Professional Documents
Culture Documents
,o
insu lfpo] Hkkjr ljdkj
jsy ea=ky;
ubZ fnYyh&110001
MEMBER MECHANICAL, RAILWAY BOARD
&
EX-OFFICIO SECRETARY,
GOVERNMENT OF INDIA
MINISTRY OF RAILWAYS
NEW DELHI-110001
S. DHASARATHY
FOREWORD
(S. Dhasarathy)
Member Mechanical
Railway Board
PREFACE
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
The revision and updating of the Manual has been the result of efforts put
in not only by the members of the Committee but also from a number of Railway
Officers and staff. The committee gratefully acknowledges the support received
in its task from the following:
S/Shri R.N. Lal, ED/PS & EMU/RDSO
S/Shri Ravindra Gupta, Director Mechanical Engg./Coaching/Rly. Board
S/Shri Amitabh Sinha, Director/Carriage/RDSO
S/Shri Manoj Khare, Director/Carriage/RDSO
S/Shri M.P. Singh, Director(PS)/RDSO
S/Shri Prem Chand, Director(PS)/RDO
S/Shri Randhawa Suhag, Director/Electrical/CAMTECH
S/Shri N.S.R. Prasad, Joint Director/Carriage/RDSO
S/Shri D. Rengarajan, Deputy Director/Carriage/RDSO
S/Shri M.P. Agarwal, Deputy Director /Carriage/RDSO
S/Shri O.P Shrivastava/Assistant Design Engineer/Carriage, RDSO
S/Shri A.D. Sawant, Chief Technical Assistant, CAMTECH
S/Shri S.M.H. Tandoor, Chief Technical Assistant, CAMTECH
S/Shri R.S. Sikarwar Chief Technical Assistant, CAMTECH
S/Shri Dhiraj Shrivastava, Data Entry Operator/CAMTECH
(P.Srivastava)
EDS (C)/RDSO
(K.K. Gupta)
CRSE/WR
(A.K. Verma)
CME/O&C/CR
(Rakesh Bahl)
Director (M)/CAMTECH
CONTENTS
Foreword
Preface
Contents
Abbreviations used
Chapter 1
Coach
Chapter 2
Shell
Chapter 3
Bogie
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Rolling Gear
Chapter 11
Interior Fittings
Chapter 12
Painting
Appendices
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Maintenance Schedules
Append ix G
IOH format
Correction Slips
Index
CHAPTER 1
COACH
Contents
Page No.
101
Introduction
102
103
104
Periodic Overhaul
105
106
107
Examination of Trains
15
108
17
109
19
110
21
111
22
112
27
113
Primary/Secondary maintenance
28
114
30
115
31
116
Detachment a Coach
31
117
32
118
Special Schedule
33
119
33
Annexure 1.1
Brake Power Certificate
35
Annexure 1.2
DRS Card in the train showing condition of mechanical equipments
37
Annexure 1.3
Warranty Card
38
Annexure 1.4
Coach failure report
39
Annexure 1.5
Warranty claim form for Workshop
40
Annexure 1.6
Warranty claim form for open line
41
CHAPTER 2
SHELL
Contents
Page No.
201
Description
202
Body Repairs
203
Roof
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
General
213
214
CHAPTER 3
BOGIE
Contents
Page No.
301
General
302
303
Bogie assembly
304
305
306
307
Springs
308
309
Side Bearers
310
Anchor Links
311
Silent Block
312
Brake Rigging
313
Equalising stays
15
314
15
315
Shock absorbers
15
316
15
317
Coil Springs
26
318
28
319
Bogie Assembly
29
320
33
321
34
322
Safety precautions
35
Annexure 3.1
Common defects found in Axle Guide Assembly
36
CHAPTER 4
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
Page No.
Introduction
Classification of Air Brake System
Principle of Operation of twin pipe graduated release Air brake system
403a Charging the brake system
403b Brake application stage
403c Brake release stage
Air Brake Subassemblies
Common pipe bracket
Intermediate Piece (Sandwitch piece)
Air brake hose
407a Brake pipe & Feed pipe hoses
407b Test procedure
Cut off angle cock
408a Overhauling of Cut of angle cock
408b Tools and Equipments
408c Procedure
408d Testing of Cut off angle cock
Brake Cylinder
409a Overhauling of Brake Cylinder
409b Tools and equipments
409c Dismantling of Brake cylinder
409d Cleaning of parts
409e Replacement of parts
409f Inspection and repair of the parts
409g Testing of Brake cylinder body for leakage
409h Assembly of Brake cylinder
409i Testing of brake cylinder
Dirt Collector
410a Salient features
410b Tools and fixtures for overhauling
410c Procedure for overhauling
410d Testing of Dirt collector
Auxiliary Reservoir
411a Salient features
411b Tools and equipment for overhauling
411c Procedure for overhauling
411d Testing of auxiliary reservoir
411e Safety precautions
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
9
9
10
10
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
18
18
19
19
19
21
21
22
22
22
22
26
26
29
29
29
31
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
33
33
34
34
421
422
423
424
425
426
34
34
35
35
36
36
36
37
37
37
38
38
38
39
39
Annexure 4.1
POH kit of C3W Distributor Valve
40
Annexure 4.2
POH kit for KPISL Distributor Valve
41
Annexure 4.3
POH kit for Cut off angle cock, for 2 way dirt collector
42
Annexure 4.4
Single Car Test
43
Annexure 4.5
Rake Test
48
CHAPTER 5
Page No.
501
General Description
502
Maintenance at Workshop
503
Lifting Shop
504
Overhaul of components
505
506
507
Slack Adjuster
508
10
509
Adjustment of brakes
10
510
11
511
11
512
12
CHAPTER 6
Contents
Page no.
601
General
602
603
604
Working Principle
605
606
Maintenance Instructions
607
608
CHAPTER 7
Page no.
701
Introduction
01
702
02
703
Trip Examination
04
704
Fortnightly Examination
10
705
Monthly Examination
10
706
Quarterly Examination
13
707
13
708
POH Schedule
15
709
20
CHAPTER 8
Contents
Page no.
801
Introduction
01
802
01
09
804
12
805
12
21
803
806
CHAPTER 9
902
903
Page No.
901a
902a
CHAPTER 10
ROLLING GEAR
Contents
Page No.
8
14
17
17
18
Annexure 10.1
Ultrasonic testing of axles
21
CHAPTER 11
INTERIOR FITTINGS
Contents
Page No.
1104 Window
1105 Floor
1106
13
1107
Doors
14
1108 Vestibule
16
CHAPTER 12
PAINTING
Contents
Page No.
1201 General
4
5
Annexure 12.1
'A' Schedule
Annexure 12.2
'C' Schedule
LIST OF APPENDIX
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Maintenance Schedules
Appendix E
Appendix F
Appendix G
IOH format
ABBREVIATIONS
''
&
+ve
0
0
C
A/F
AC
alt.
AR
BC
BP
BPC
BPC
C&W
CCR
CEE
cm
CME
CMI
CO2
COM
CP
CR
CSC
CSK
DA
DC
DEE
dia. (Dia)
DME
Drg
DRS
DV
EFT
Elect.
EOT Crane
Eq.
Fig
FP
FRP
GRP
Hd.
hex.
HPC
HRC
Inch
And
Diameter
Positive
Degree
Degree Centigrade
Across face
Air Conditioned
Alteration
Auxiliary Reservoir
Brake Cylinder
Brake Power
Brake Power Certificate
Bharat Petroleum Corporation
Carriage & Wagon
Carriage Controller
Chief Electrical Engineer
Centimetre
Chief Mechanical Engineer
Carriage Maintenance Instructions
Carbon dioxide gas
Chief Operating Manager
Centre Pivot
Control Reservoir
Chief Security Commissioner
Counter Sunk
Direct Admission Valve
Direct Current
Divisional Electrical Engineer
Diameter
Divisional Mechanical Engineer
Drawing
Deficiency in Rolling Stock
Distributor Valve
Emergency Feed Terminal
Electrical
Electric Overhead Travelling Crane
Equalising
Figure
Feed Pipe
Fibre Reinforced Plastic
Government Railway Police
Head
Hexagonal
Hindustan Petroleum Corporation
Hardness on Rockwell 'C' scale
I.C.
ICF
IOC
IOH
IRCA
IS
kg
kmph
kW
m
M.R.
Max.
MCB
Min.
Mm
no.
nos.
O.D.
OCV
PCV
PM
POH
Pr.
PVC
RCF
RDSO
ref.
rev.
RMPU
RPF
RTR
SC
SG
SM
SMI
Sp.
Spec
Sr. DME
SS
STR
SWG
t
TL
V
-ve
Isolating Cock
Integral Coach Factory
Indian Oil Corporation
Intermediate Overhaul
Indian Railway conference Association
Indian Standards
Kilogram
Kilometre per hour
Kilo Watt
Metre
Main Reservoir
maximum
Miniature Circuit Breaker
minimum
Millimetre
Number
Numbers
Outer diameter
Other Coaching Vehicle
Passenger Coaching Vehicle
Primary Maintenance
Periodic Overhauling
Pressure
Poly Vinyl Chloride
Rail Coach Factory
Research Design and Standard Organisation
Reference
Revision
Roof Mounted AC Package
Railway Protection Force
Rake Testing Rig
Security Commissioner
Self generating
Secondary Maintenance
Standard Maintenance Instruction
Specific
Specification
Senior Divisional Mechanical Engineer
Stainless steel
Schedule of Technical Requirements
Standard Wire gauge
Tonne
Train Lighting
Voltage
Negative
Coach
CHAPTER 1
COACH
102
101
INTRODUCTION
The first attempt at standardisation of
manufacture of passenger coaches on
Indian Railways led to the development of
IRS design of steel bodied coaches. An
integral all metal coach design was taken
from M/s Schlieren, Switzerland in 1954
for manufacture at Integral Coach Factory,
Perambur. The original design had bogies
with speed potential of 96 kmph only. The
design was modified to all coil bogies
with longer suspension hangers and
weight transfer through side bearers,
thereby enabling speed potential to 105
kmph on main line standard track and
gradually
to
140
kmph
for
Rajdhani/Shatabdi Express trains on
tracks maintained to standards laid down
in RDSO report No. C&M-I, volume I.
Over the years changes have been made to
use helical springs instead of laminated
springs in the secondary suspension while
minor changes in the shell have been
made to reduce corrosion and improve the
strength of certain members. At present
all new coaches are being manufactured
with bogie mounted air brake system and
enhanced capacity draw gear. To meet the
demands of the passengers, coaches of
various layout like second class sitting
accommodation, sleepers, upper class, air
conditioned chair car and sleeper, pantry
cars, generator cars, luggage-cumpassenger cars and postal vans have been
designed and manufactured. Luxury
coaches mainly to boost tourism having
air conditioned sleeping and sitting
accommodation with catering facilities
have
also
been
designed
and
manufactured. On date, more than a
hundred coach layouts catering to the
needs of different class of passengers are
on line. Transportation codes for coaches
in general use are given in Appendix A.
Chapter 1, Page 1 of 41
103
Steel
bodied
coaches
(including dining/pantry cars)
25 years
IRS coaches
30 years
40
years
PERIODICITY
OF
PERIODIC
OVERHAULS
(POH)
IN
DESIGNATED WORKSHOPS
Table 1.1
i)
12 months
18 months. 12 months
for AC coaches.
iii)OCVs on other
than Mail and
Express rakes
24 months
iv)Rajdhani
and
Shatabdi
Express Coaches
POH in workshops
after 4 lakhs kms or 18
months whichever is
earlier.
IOH in workshops after
2 lakhs kms or 9
months whichever is
earlier
104.
PERIODICAL OVERHAUL
104a
104b
104c
104d
105
105a
105b
Coach
105d
105e
105f
105g
106
106a
106b
Chapter 1, Page 2 of 41
Coach
1
F
A
1
C
2
D
3
10
H
2
N
9
ACTIVITY DESCRIPTION
11
G
3
12
DURATION (Days)
1P
1P
2P
3P
9P
3P
3P
2P
1P
3P
1P
1P
1P
9
FIGURE 1.1
LIFTING PADS
SKETCH-68078
Chapter 1, Page 3 of 41
Coach
COACH 3250
NOTE:P1.
SEE C.R.DRG.
FOR DETAILS
NO. J&TP
SEE C.R.DRG.
DEV-99 &102
NO. J&T DEV-85P2. FOR ALTE RNATIVE DESIGNS
150
U/FRAME 2742
275
3008
1250
1680
600
25
1850
1100
32
1250
SKETCH - 77310
600
750
FIGURE 1.3
Chapter 1, Page 4 of 41
106c
Coach
Buffer height
i)
Production
units
Workshops
ii)
Maximum
height from
rail level
1105 mm
Minimum
height from
rail level
1095 mm
1105 mm
1090 mm
iii)
iv)
v)
NOTES:
i)
ii)
Chapter 1, Page 5 of 41
vi)
Type of coach
Crown
clearance (mm)
+0
43
-3
27+0
-3
Coach
PART- I
BOGIE FRAME
L.S. BEAM
BOGIE BOLSTER
RAIL LEVEL
PART- II
BODY BOLSTER
SIDE BEARER
BOGIE FRAME
J
L
BOGIE BOLSTER
RAIL LEVEL
NOTE - P1. Dimensions E & J shall be maintained with required number of compensating rings of standard thickness of 4 mm.P2. Axle box springs : WTAC
-0-1-202P
Bolster springs : WTAC -0-5-202
2
2
FIGURE 1.4a
Chapter 1, Page 6 of 41
Coach
40 5
646 5
11
307 3
43 5
640 +8/-5
296+6/-4
310 3
40 5
646 5
18
14
291+7/-4
305 3
45 5
637 +8/-5
LOAD
WGFAC4
Tare
Gross
Tare
Gross
Tare
Gross
Tare
Gross
Tare
Gross
Tare
Gross
385
34+8/-5
385
23+8/-5
385
28+8/-5
385
28+8/-5
385
31+8/-5
385
32+8/-5
40 5
44 5
40 5
54 5
40 5
49 5
40 5
48 5
40 5
46 5
40 5
45 5
36 3
32 +5/-2
36 3
22 +5/-2
36 3
27 +5/-2
36 3
28 +5/-2
36 3
30 +5/-2
36 3
31 +5/-2
275+6/-4
275+6/-4
276+6/-4
262+6/-4
274+6/-4
265+6/-4
272+6/-4
264+6/-4
273+6/-4
267+6/-4
282+6/-4
277+6/-4
290 3
286 3
290 3
276 3
290 3
281 3
290 3
282 3
290 3
284 3
290 3
285 3
686 5
682 5
686 5
672 5
686 5
677 5
686 5
678 5
686 5
680 5
686 5
681 5
1104 +0/-10
1098 +8/-5
1104 +0/-10
1075 +8/-5
1104 +0/-10
1085 +8/-5
1104 +0/-10
1086 +8/-5
1104 +0/-10
1091 +8/-5
1104 +0/-10
1093 +8/-5
70 3
66 3
70 3
55 3
70 3
60 3
70 3
60 3
70 3
63 3
70 3
64 3
299+6/-4
295+6/-4
300+5/-4
285+7/-4
298+6/-4
288+7/-4
296+6/-5
286+7/-4
297+6/-4
290+7/-4
307+6/-3
301+6/-4
310 3
308 3
310 3
295 3
310 3
300 3
310 3
300 3
310 3
303 3
310 3
304 3
40 5
44 5
40 5
55 5
40 5
50 5
40 5
50 5
40 5
47 5
40 5
46 5
Tare
385
405
363
279+6/-4
290 3
686 5
1104 +0/-10
70 3
304+6/-4
310 3
Gross
35+8/-5
435
33+5/-2
276+6/-4
287 3
683 5
1098 +8/-5
67 3
301+6/-4
Tare
385
405
363
272+6/-4
290 3
686 5
1104 +0/-10
70 3
Gross
33+8/-5
445
32+5/-2
268+6/-4
286 3
682 5
1095 +8/-5
65 3
WGSCZAC
WGSCWAC
WGFSCZAC
WGFSCWAC
END
END
NON
DRIVING
DRIVING
WGMWAC
ARMVAC
646 5
638 +8/-5
646 5
617 +8/-5
646 5
627 +8/-5
646 5
628 +8/-5
646 5
633 +8/-5
648 5
635 +8/-5
MY
Y
Nominal
15
14
16
18
17
8
-
COACH
Chapter 1, Page 7 of 41
Coach
Table 1.4
Description
WGFAC4
WGSCZAC
WGSCWAC
WGMWAC
ARMVAC
49.75
49.30
50.00
46.50
49.30
6.200
6.200
6.200
6.200
6.200
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.400
3.200
3.200
3.200
3.200
3.200
1.440
(18x80 kg)
5.680
(71x80 kg)
3.680
(46x80 kg)
2.275
(34+1)x65 kg
1.495
(23x65 kg)
Over load
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
1.440
5.680
3.680
2.275
1.495
51.19
54.98
53.65
48.78
50.79
18.68
18.45
18.80
17.05
DE
17.87
19.23
18.19
18.31
20.08
Test
load/Bogie
Tare
Gross
Chapter 1, Page 8 of 41
19.38
21.29
20.64
NDE
Coach
PART- I
c9
%%
15
L.S. BEAM
BOGIE BOLSTER
BOGIE FRAME
RAIL LEVEL
2896 (WHEEL BASE)
PART- II
BODY BOLSTER
SIDE BEARER
BOGIE FRAME
BOGIE BOLSTER
RAIL LEVEL
NOTE - P1. Dimensions A & B marked should be ensured less than dimensions C & D marked respectively.P2. # CR to drawing No.-CC01140 to be
provided.P3. * CR to drawing No. - CC05252 to be provided.P4. 'F' the variation in all the four bogie corner heights must be less than or equal to
10 mm.P5. Drawing No. WTAC3-9-0.306 alt -e, AE90014, AE90015 are superseded by this drawing.P6. The height of axle box spring and Bolster
spring in tare and gross conditions is for reference only.P7. The requirement of CR's as shown in the columns for primary & secondary suspension is for
reference only.P8. The compensation by means of CR's must not exceed 20 mm in primary in all coaches except ACCN (SG) inP
ACCN (SG) it is
30 mm & 30 mm in secondary suspension for all coaches.
FIGURE 1.4b
Chapter 1, Page 8 of 41
5.12
20.07
22.63
405
535
703
573
268+7/-4
256+7/-5
22
291+7/-4
278+7/-5
19
353
233
6465
621+8/-5
1104+0/-10
1079+8/-5
5.36
15.35
18.03
405
545
703
563
290 +6/-3
278 +6/-4
Nil
316 +6/-3
302 +6/-4
Nil
323
203
6465
620 +8/-5
1104+0/-10
1078+8/-5
ACCZ
(EOG)
5.12
ACCN
(SG)
5.36
ACCN
(EOG)
Chapter 1, Page 10 of 41
1078+8/-5
1104+0/-10
620+8/-5
6465
1086+8/-5
1104+0/-10
628 +8/-5
6465
223
1086+8/-5
1104+0/-10
628+8/-5
6465
203
283
Gross
Tare
Gross
Tare
Gross
Tare
CR
223
303
Nil
Gross
Bolster spring
height
343
302+7/-5
Tare
H
291 +7/-4
312+5/-4
CR
289+7/-4
301 +6/-4
Gross
303+6/-4
14
278+6/-4
Tare
Gross
12
268 +6/-4
286+5/-4
603
Tare
Gross
266+7/-4
276 +5/-4
603
703
505
Body bogie
clearance
278+6/-4
563
703
505
In
tonnes
Bogie frame
bolster
clearance
C
703
545
In
tonnes
Tare
Under
Gross
405
18.04
Under
tare
405
20.19
16.2
In tonnes
405
20.51
18.35
3.68
In tonnes
Total
pay
load
17.95
3.68
3.68
In tonnes
Normal
pay load
5.12
3.68
44.8
Tare
weight
of coach
5.12
49.1
ACCW
(SG)
48.3
ACCW
(EOG)
52.53
Type
of
coach
43.1
AC
X
Y
Z
5.12
19.45
22.01
405
545
703
563
271+7/-4
259+7/-5
19
295+7/-4
281+7/-5
15
353
233
6465
620+8/-5
1104+0/-10
1079+8/-5
17.14
17.14
405
435
703
673
282+5/-3
279+6/-4
8
307+5/-3
304+5/-4
3
223
193
6465
640+8/-5
1104+0/-10
10988/-5
RA AC
1.20
IRQ
ACCN
(SG)
5.12
(HIGH
CAPA
CITY)
1.20
Chapter 1, Page 11 of 41
VP
10388/-5
1104+0/-10
580+8/-5
6465
1098+8/-5
1104+0/-10
640+8/-5
6465
173
1086+8/-5
1104+0/-10
628+8/-5
6465
193
273
1075+8/-5
1104+0/-10
617+8/-5
6465
223
353
Gross
Tare
Gross
Tare
Gross
Tare
Gross
CR
113
203
Nil
291+7/-4
Tare
Bolster spring
height
363
17
308+5/-4
307+5/-4
Nil
294+5/-4
318+5/-3
Gross
CR
269+5/-4
298+5/-3
Nil
268+6/-4
Tare
Gross
310+5/-3
11
283+6/-4
281+6/-4
543
Tare
Gross
03
276+6/-4
291+5/-3
603
703
565
262+6/-4
279+5/-3
663
703
505
Body bogie
clearance
287+5/-3
293
703
445
In
tonnes
Tare
In
tonnes
Bogie frame
bolster
clearance
C
703
815
405
20.14
Under
Gross
405
16.94
17.22
In tonnes
Under
tare
405
14.05
15.10
5.84
In tonnes
405
21.3
14.45
3.68
5.84
In tonnes
Total
pay
load
9.8
1.20
3.68
46.83
Norm
al pay
load
23
1.20
42.6
Tare
weight
of coach
23
RA
(NON
AC)
41.3
FACZ
(EOG)
32
ACCZ
(SG)
41.3
Type
of
coach
46.69
AC
Crown
clearance
Bogie bolster
height
Coupler
height
X
Y
Z
Coach
PART- I
c91
%%
5
#
L.S. BEAM
BOGIE BOLSTER
BOGIE FRAME
RAIL LEVEL
2896 (WHEEL BASE)
PART- II
Weight of each bogie = 5.9
tPUnsprung mass/bogie = 3.2 tPBolster
weight
= 0.4 tPC.R. =
Compensating ring
BODY BOLSTER
SIDE BEARER
BOGIE FRAME
BOGIE BOLSTER
RAIL LEVEL
NOTE - P1. Dimensions A & B marked should be ensured less than dimensions C & D marked respectively.P2. # CR to drawing
No.-CC01140 to be provided.P3. * CR to drawing No. - CC05251 to be provided.P4. 'F' the variation in all the four bogie corner
heights must be less than or equal to 10 mm.P5. Drawing No. SG90002, SZ90004, SE90011, LB90002 are superseded by this
drawing.P6. The height of Axle box spring and bolster spring in tare & gross conditions is for reference only.P7. The requirement of CR's
as shown in the columns for primary & 30 mm in secondary suspension.P8. Only blue bend springs both in primary and secondary
stage are to be used in postal van coach.
FIGURE 1.4c
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
SOC
37.00
7.02
100%
14.04
12.6
19.62
405
815
703
293
289 +4/-3
257 +6/-4
1
308 +5/-3
267 +7/-5
7
503
183
6465
572 +8/-5
1104+0/-10
1030+8/-5
SCN
38.03
5.76
5.76
13.12
16.00
405
575
703
533
287+4/-3
273+5/-3
3
305+5/-3
288+6/-4
10
313
173
6465
616+8/-5
1104+0/-10
1074+8/-5
GS
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
1043+8/-5
1104+0/-10
585+8/-5
6465
Gross
Tare
Gross
Tare
Gross
CR
203
Tare
Bolster spring
height
473
Gross
CR
274+7/-4
Tare
308+5/-3
Gross
262+5/-4
Tare
Gross
Body bogie
clearance
289+4/-3
363
Tare
Gross
Bogie
frame
bolster
clearance
C
703
743
Tare
Under
Gross
In tonnes
405
18.45
Under
tare
In tonnes
Total
pay
load
12.6
In tonnes
Over
load
11.70
In tonnes
Norm
al pay
load
100%
In tonnes
Tare
weight
of
coach
5.85
In tonnes
Type
of
coach
36.99
AC
X
Y
Z
IRQ
SCN
37.2
5.76
5.76
12.7
15.58
405
575
703
533
289 +4/-3
275 +5/-3
1
308 +5/-3
291 +6/-4
7
303
173
6465
616 +8/-5
1104+0/-10
1074+8/-5
Post
al
Van
36.5
3.0
3.0
12.35
13.85
405
495
703
613
290+4/-3
283+5/-3
Nil
310+5/-3
301+6/-4
5
223
153
6465
630+8/-5
1104+0/-10
1088+8/-5
VP
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
1039+8/-5
1104+0/-10
581+8/-5
6465
1035+8/-5
1104+0/-10
577+8/-5
6465
203
Gross
Tare
Gross
Tare
Gross
Tare
113
503
CR
Bolster spring
height
393
Gross
13
269+7/-5
Tare
265+7/-5
308+5/-3
CR
Gross
302+5/-3
258+6/-4
257+6/-4
Tare
Gross
289+4/-3
313
Tare
Gross
Body bogie
clearance
285+4/-3
333
703
795
Bogie
frame
bolster
clearance
C
703
775
In tonnes
Tare
Under
Gross
405
19.25
Under
tare
In tonnes
405
19.30
12.65
In tonnes
Total
pay
load
10.30
13.20
In tonnes
Over
load
18.00
2.6
In tonnes
Norm
al pay
load
10.60
In tonnes
Tare
weight
of
coach
18.00
SLR
37.10
Type
of
coach
32.00
AC
Crown
clearance
Bogie
bolster
height
Coupler
height
X
Y
Z
107
EXAMINATION OF TRAINS
107a
i)
ii)
107b
Enroute/Terminating Examination of
Passenger Trains
i)
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
ii)
Coach
b) Speed of the train shall not be more
than 30 KMPH,
c) It should cover the entire length of
train,
d) Should have adequate space for fixing
the lighting arrangement and for staff.
For rolling in examination of train it has
to be ensured that proper lighting
arrangement is provided on both the sides
of the track at nominated spots for
examination of undergear parts during
night. Focussing of lights shall be done by
keeping a coach on the line and adjusting
the angle of light to illuminate undergear
and bogie. Use of fixed lights as indicated
in figure 1.5 is preferable.
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
Coach
370
100
300
50
300
50
300
100
225
100
30 MM FLAT
225
250
HINGES
550
50
100
450
225
EXPANDED METAL
MESH
ISMC 100
325
CONCRETE BASE
G.L.
R9
6
8 %
%
598
1200
21
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
FIGURE 1.6
x)
Coach
Lavatories of the coaches should be properly cleaned using High pressure water jet machine provided at nominated stations during halt of the train. Any
complaint from passengers should be attended promptly to the satisfaction of the passenger.
xi)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)
108.
After attending to any required repairs stop board/red flag should be removed.
Carriage controller (CCR) should be informed about any out of course work done.
CCR shall repeat the out of course work done to the Primary Maintenance (PM) depot after corrective action.
At the train examination stations where locomotives are changed on through trains, the level of air pressure/vacuum created on the locomotive and brake
van gauges should be recorded on the certificate to be issued to the guard and driver on prescribed form. The inoperative/blanked cylinders, if any, should
also be written in the certificate for their information. This certification should be an endorsement on the original brake power certificate; no fresh brake
power certificate needs to be issued.
MAINTENANCE PATTERN FOR COACHING TRAINS
(Railway Board letter no. 95/M(C)/141/1 dtd. 29.10.01 )
Table 1.8
Sr.
No.
Category of trains
Preventive
maintenance
schedules at pitline
Internal cleaning,
passenger amenity
attention
and
watering
01
Mail/Exp.
Oneway
run>2500
kms
At primary end
External
cleaning
on
nominated line
with
proper
facilities
At both the ends
02
Mail/Exp.
One
way
run<2500
kms but round
trip run> 2500
kms
Mail/Exp. Round
Trip run upto
2500 kms
At primary end
At primary end
3
(a)
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
Enroute/Terminating
examination
Brake
system
check prior to
start at platform
at the other end
Complete
air/
vacuum check with
fresh BPC.
At primary ends
- do -
Complete
air/vacuum check
with fresh BPC.
Only
continuity
check if stabled at
platform,
otherwise, brake
power check with
endorsement
on
original BPC.
Coach
Sr.
No.
Category of trains
Preventive
maintenance
schedules at pitline
Internal cleaning,
passenger amenity
attention
and
watering
3
(b)
Shuttles/Intercon
nected Mail/Exp.
round trip run
upto 2500 kms.
At primary end
4.
Passenger trains
with
toilets
including
interconnected
passenger
trains/Shuttles
At primary end
5.
Passenger trains
without toilets.
At primary end
External
cleaning
on
nominated line
with
proper
facilities
At primary end
Once a day for
shuttles.
Enroute/Terminating
examination
Brake
system
check prior to
start at platform
at the other end
Only
continuity
check if stabled at
platform,
otherwise, brake
power check with
endorsement
on
original BPC.
At every terminal
or as decided by
the CME to ensure
proper cleanliness.
At primary end.
Once a day
At primary end.
Only
continuity
check if stabled at
platform,
otherwise
brake
power check with
endorsement
on
original BPC.
Internal cleaning, Passenger amenity attention and watering may be done at platform line or nominated stabling line provided stipulated facilities are available at
such line.
Incase the rake stabled in yard for more than 6 hours positive safety arrangement should be made for the rake and in case the security is considered inadequate, the
rakes should be taken to pit line for attention to under gear as given under column (4).
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
108a
Coach
i)
PRIMARY END:
i)
109
WASHING
COACHES
AND
CLEANING
OF
109a
i)
109b
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
109c
Cleaning of Toilet
Coach
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
109d
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
i)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)
109e
i)
ii)
iii)
109f
i)
ii)
Coach
Maintenance Practices
related requirements
(i)
110
CONDITIONS
REQUIRED
FOR
MAINTENANCE OF 24 COACH
TRAINS
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
and
system
Operational requirements
Coach
i)
ii)
iii)
111
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
OPEN LINE DEPOTS
111a
Nomination of a Depot
i)
ii)
IN
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
111b
Special Repairs
i)
ii)
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
iii)
111c
Intermediate Overhaul
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
111d
i)
ii)
The station staff shall ensure that no nonblock coach is attached in any Block Rake
Coach
Destination Boards
i)
111f
Fire Extinguishers
i)
111g
i)
v)
111h
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
vi)
111i
i)
Coach
40
115
50
50
22,
TO BE
FITTED INSIDE
19
EXISTING FUNNEL
150
25
195
40
50
DOG BOX
EXISTING OBSERVATION
CEILING
25
RACK FOR PORTABLE
40
24
200
40
22,
SIDE WALL
800
10
1,2
TO BE
40
CONTROL TELEPHONE
FITTED OUTSIDE
16
15
200
150
DOUBLE FLAP
254
M5 CSK HD.
DOOR
SCREW
STOPER FOR FEED BOX
800
NOTE:-
WEDGES/SKIDS ETC.
14
610
430
FLOOR LEVEL
10
3.15
4
6
18,
ANGLE
3.15
100
18
610
80
50
200
200
%%uSECTION - XX
45
%%
C 45
110
%%C6.5
R3.15
50
2R
%%c10
3.15
GUARD'S LOCK
CA/DW-920
24
HANDLE
ICF DRG.No.
T-5-6-020
23
DOOR BOLT
200 mm
22
21
HINGE
SIZE-100 mm
20
SHEET
3.15x195x200
19
ANGLE
3.15x70x295
18
ANGLE
3.15x70x1900
17
ANGLE
ISA 5050x3
16
FEED BOX
15
WATER CONTAINER
14
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
13
SPRING WASHER M6
20
12
HEX.HD.NUT M6
20
45
11
HEX.HD.BOLT M6x40
20
10
100
200
200
200
75
100
CSK.HD.RIVET %%c5x14
28
COMPREG
BRACKET 3.15x147x280
PLATE 3.15x40x220
3.15x185x335
BRACKET
ANGLE
3.15x75x800
ANGLE
3.15x80x1060
BRACKET
2x30x462
100
800
75
25
20
18
5mm THICK BACK PIECE
WITH CUT A WAY
IS:2062-99
Fe 410 WC
IS:2062-99
Fe 410 WC
IS:281-73
FIG.-2
IS:204-91
PART-1
IS:1341-81
TABLE-3
IS:1079
GRADE-DD
IS:1079
GRADE-DD
IS:1079
GRADE-DD
IS:808-76
(PART V)
IS:737-74
31000 H2
40
100
50
30
75
11
130
238
280
25
26
300
2R
11
20
30
110
109
100
30
25
200
800
200
50
150
%%uSECTION - YY
26
100
50
30
25
(50x25x3.15)
%%C6.5 HOLES
20
WELDED TO ANGLE
500
340
%%uVIEW
150
FITTED INSIDE
180
50
TO BE
50
22,
25
800
FLOOR LEVEL
240
300
300
26
21
420
40
100
EXISTING DOG BOX
3,4,5
254
178
200
17
FLOOR LEVEL
150
STRETCHER
11,12,13
18
%%uDETAIL AT -A
130
25
1400
23
LAV.
3.15
60
20
1,2
EXISTING WATER
PIPES WHERE
PROVIDED
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
6x297x800
BEML DRG.No.
412-29100
IS:2171-85
IS:1364
PART-3
IS:1364
PART-1
IS:2907-64
TAB-3,FIG-3
IS:740-77
64430 WP
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
LAV.
LAV.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
CSK.HD. BOLT20
M5X15
%%uDETAIL AT -B
REF.-34
IS:1079
GRADE-DD
IS:1079
GRADE-DD
IS:1079
GRADE-DD
IS:1079
GRADE-DD
IS:1079
GRADE-DD
IS:207-64
TYPE-1
LUGGAGE COMPT.
ITEM
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
No.
OFF
IS:1812-61
IS:1079
GRADE-DD
LUGGAGE COMPT.
REF. DRG.
WT. OF
ONE Kg
z
vuqeki
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
LAV.
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
ROOM
ROOM
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
DOG BOX BELOW & TABLE
WITH PEGION HOLES ABOVE
ROOM
1:10
1:5
1:2
1:1
FIGURE 1.7
STD-26/K0
12/2000
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
Vsl
zz
ts,l
REMARKS
ih
lh
Mh
LK-8/K0014A1
TYPE-2
STR C-9407
IS:412-75
TAB-1
CAP. 5 Kg
EACH
IS:3063
TAB.1,TYPE-B
SKETCH
- K0014
ii)
iii)
Coach
vi)
iv)
v)
vii)
viii)
a)
ix)
xii)
111j
Reporting of thefts
i)
111k
i)
x)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
Coach
vii)
111
Coach
Table 1.9
S.
No
Description
of item
Warranty period
1.
Distributor
valve
Air
brake
cylinder
-do-
BP/FP hose
-do-
Slack adjuster
-do-
Shock
absorber
Direct
mounted
spherical
Roller bearing
Upholstery for
1st AC coaches
and executive
class chair car
of
shatabdi
express
Composition
brake blocks
10
UIC
type
elastomer
flange for UIC
vestibule
Rubber spring
of 1000 kg.m
side buffers
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES TO
BE FOLLOWED IN COACHING
DEPOTS
112a
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
i)
112c
2.
112d
Coach
113b
113c
i)
i)
113
PRIMARY/ SECONDARY
MAINTENANCE
113a
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
ii)
113d
*
*
*
*
Coach
underframes
bogie frames
axle boxes
springs.
(i)
(v)
(vi)
Table 1.10
Brake cylinder piston stroke
Type
Minimum
32
Maxi
mum
95
75
95
125
135
Table 1.11
'A' & 'e' dimension for slack adjuster
Type
of 'A'
'e' dimension
bogie
dimension
13
tonne 16 2 mm 375 25 mm
bogie
16.25 tonne 22 2 mm 375 25 mm
bogie
113f The following coach body components
and fittings should be specially checked
and attended to :
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
Coach
i)
114
114a
ii)
114b
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(x)
115
115a
115b
Coach
ii)
iii)
(i)
116b
ii)
Other assembly maintenance
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
116
DETACHMENT A COACH
and
116a
For
IOH
maintenance.
i)
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
schedule
iii)
iv)
v)
PROCEDURE
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
117
Coach
(iii)
(i)
(ii)
117a
(iv)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Polishing
surfaces.
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
Thorough
examination
and
repairs of upholstery, cushions,
curtains, etc.
(viii)
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
of
the
polished
(x)
117d
117e
Coach
119.
(a)
(b)
c)
ii)
iii)
d)
e)
118
SPECIAL SCHEDULE
118a
118b
118c
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
(f)
(h)
Chapter 1, Page 13 of 41
Coach
Coach
Annexure 1.1
Hkkjrh; jsy
Indian Railways
czsd ikoj izek.k Ik=
BRAKE POWER CERTIFICATE
1. Date
fnukWad
2. Station/Railways
LVsku@ jsYos
3. Train No.
Vus ua-
4. Load
yksM
5. Engine No.
batu ua-
6. Attached at
xkMh ij yxus dk le;
7. Vac./Air
Pr.ready
oSD;we@ ,;j izSkj
rS;kj gksus dk le;
8. Vac/Air Pr. on
Departure
oSD;we@ ,;j izSkj
pyrs le;
In engine
FP
Vac. cms of Hg
BP
batu esa
Air Pressure
(kg/cm2)
In Brake Van
100%
czsdoku esa
Rear end
fiNyk fljk
Middle
e/;
THIS CERTIFICATE IS VALID UPTO DESTINATION PROVIDED THE RAKE INTEGRITY IS NOT
BROKEN OR CHANGED BY MORE THAN TWO VEHICLE UNITS OR THE TRAIN ENGINE IS
NOT CHANGED IF RAKE INTEGRITY IS BROKEN BY MORE THAN TWO VEHICLE UNITS, A
FRESH CERTIFICATE IS REQUIRED. IF THE TRAIN ENGINE IS CHANGED. THE CERTIFICATE
SHOULD BE VALIDATED BY ENGINEER (C&W) THROUGH ENDORSEMENT IN THE COLUMN
ON THE REVERSE.
;g izek.k Ik= iwjs jSd ds xarO; LFkku rd ;fn [kafMr u gqbZ gks tkjh fd;k tk;sxk ;k nks dksp ls vf/kd bdkbZ esa ifjofrZr gqbZ
gks ;k Vsu batu dks u cnyk x;k gksA ;fn jSd dh v[kaMrk nks dksp ls vf/kd bdkbZ esa ifjofrZr gqbZ gks rks izek.k Ik= dh
vko;drk gksrh gSA izek.k Ik= dh oS/krk vfHk;ark dS ,oa oS- }kjk fiNyh rjQ fy[ks dkWye }kjk fd;k tk;sxkA
Drivers name & signature Guards name & signature
Mkboj dk uke o gLrk{kj
xkMZ dk uke o gLrk{kj
(Space for enroute endorsement & Drivers remarks on the reverse)
Mkboj dh fkdk;rsa ihNs iUus ij
Chapter 1, Page 35 of 41
Engineer (C&W)
vfHk;ark dS ,oa oS-
Coach
Engine
No.
batu ua-
Percentage
of
brake power
czsd ikoj dk izfrkr
frkr
Signature
Engineer
xkM+h ijh{kd
gLrk{kj
IMPORTANT
1.
The incoming Driver shall handover the certificate to relieving driver. If he is leaving the train without
relief, it shall be deposited with the authority nominated to receive it, who will give it to the outgoing
Driver.
bu dfeax Mkboj dks pkfg, fd og vius izek.k Ik= vkmV xksbax Mkboj dks lkSai ns vkSj ;fn og fcuk fjyhoj ds Vsu NksM+
jgk gS rks og vius izek.k Ik= ml vf/kd`r O;fDr ds ikl tek djsa tks fjyhfoax Mkboj dks lkSaisaA
2.
The outgoing Driver & Guard will satisfy themselves from the coach nos. given in item 10 that the
certificate pertains to their train.
tkus okys Mkboj rFkk xkMZ] vkbVe dzekad 10 esa fn;s x;s dksp la[;kvksa ls vius vki dks larq"V djsxsa tks mldh xkM+h ls
lEcfU/kr izek.k i= gksrs gSaA
3.
It is responsibility of the Driver of train to satisfy himself that the brake power certificate is proper and
valid, before working the train shall handover the certificate to relieving driver. If he is leaving the
train without relief, it shall be deposited with the authority nominated to receive it, who will give it to
the outgoing Driver.
;g Vsu Mkboj dh ftEesnkjh gS fd og vius vki dks larq"V djsa fd czsd ikoj dk izek.k i= mfpr ,oa oS/k gSA xkM+h ds dk;Z
djus ls igys og ;g izek.k i= fjyhfoax Mkboj dks gLrkUrfjr djsxkA ;fn og xkM+h dks fcuk fjyhoj vk;s NksM+rk gS rks og
ukekafdr ,oa ftEesnkj O;fDr dks gLrkUrfjr djsxk tks
tks ckgj tkus okys pkyd dks gLrkUrfjr djsxkA
Chapter 1, Page 36 of 41
of
ds
Coach
Annexure 1.2
CENTRAL RAILWAY
DRS CARD IN THE TRAIN SHOWING CONDITION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENTS
Tumbler
holder
Mirror
shelves
Ladder or
foot steps
Folding
Table
Window
Shutter
Remarks
Towel Rail
Push Cocks
Shower roses
& valves
Mirrors
Ash tray
Coach NO.
Type &
Owning Rly.
Train No. .
Coat hook
Rake No.
10
11
12
At Departure
Signature of inspecting staff
On Arrival
Engineer (C&W)
Engineer (C&W)
RPF
RPF
Guard
Checking official will enter date, time and place after signature.
Chapter 1, Page 37 of 41
13
Check
enroute
14
Coach
Annexure 1.3
WARRANTY CARD
PROFORMA FOR REPORTING DEFECTS ON THE NEWLY BUILT COACHES DURING THE
WARRANTY PERIOD
1.
Coach No.
2.
3.
Owning Railways
4.
Name of manufacturer
5.
Date of manufacture
6.
Date of commission
7.
8.
9.
Engineer (C&W)
(Rubber stamp of the depot)
Chapter 1, Page 38 of 41
Coach
Annexure 1.4
------------ Railway
Carriage Depot .. (station)
COACH FAILURE REPORT
Train Details:
Date
Station
Originating Stn.
Prim. Maint. Depot
Coach Details:
Coach Number
Coach type code
Last POH Date & Shop
Train No.
Division
Last Exam. Stn
Sec. Maint. Depot.
Owning Railway & Base Depot
Coach Make: IRS/ICF/BEML/RCF
Return Date
Failure Particulars:
Cause of Failure (Detachment)
Defect found (on examination)
Defect code
Remarks:
File No.
DRM(M)'s Office,
---- Railway
---- (Station)
Date:---------
(Signature)
(Name and Designation)
Chapter 1, Page 39 of 41
Coach
Annexure - 1.5
File No.
CWM's Office
Carriage Workshop
__________Railway
Tele/Fax. no.
e.mail no.
Date:
To,
M/s
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sub: Warranty claim for failed /defective item (name) ___________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Inspecting Officer
For CWM
Copy to:1.
CME/ Rly. for kind information
2.
COS/ Rly. for kind information
3.
ED/Carriage/ RDSO Manak nagar Lucknow - 226011
4.
CME/ ICF Perambur, Chennai/ RCF Kapurthala & BEML Bangalore
5.
COS/ ICF Perambur, Chennai/ RCF Kapurthala & BEML Bangalore
6.
Dy COS/Workshop for proper storage, delivery and receipt
7.
Inspecting agency
Chapter 1, Page 40 of 41
Coach
Annexure - 1.6
File No.
CDO's/ DRM's Office
_________ Division
___________Railway
Tele/Fax. no.
e.mail
Date:
To,
M/s
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sub: Warranty claim for failed /defective item (name of item)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Depot Officer/DME
For DRM(M)
Copy to:1.
CME/ Rly. for kind information
2.
COS/ Rly. for kind information
3.
ED/Carriage/ RDSO Manak nagar Lucknow - 226011
4.
CME/ ICF Perambur, Chennai/ RCF Kapurthala & BEML Bangalore
5.
COS/ ICF Perambur, Chennai/ RCF Kapurthala & BEML Bangalore
6.
CWM/Workshop
7.
Dy COS/Workshop for proper storage, delivery and receipt
8.
Inspecting agency
Chapter 1, Page 41 of 41
Shell
CHAPTER 2
SHELL
201
DESCRIPTION
Table 2.1
Over Buffers
(mm)
Over Body
(mm)
ICF/RCF
BEML
IRS
22297
22296
21996
21337
21336
21030
3245
3250
3251
Height from
Rail level
(mm)
4025
3991
3886
HEIGHT FROM
RAIL LEVEL
Coaches
OVER BODY
OVERALL WIDTH
OVER BUFFERS
COACH SHELL
Figure 2.1
201a
Chapter 2, Page 1 of 9
Shell
CAR LINE
CANT RAIL
BODY
PILLAR
LIGHT RAIL
WAIST RAIL
SOLE BAR
SIDE WALLSHEET
THROUGH FLOOR
201b
201c
201d
202
BODY REPAIRS
202a
Chapter 2, Page 2 of 9
202b
202c
Inspection of Underframe
i)
Shell
25
5.0
2.0
110
252.5
110
25
END STANCHION
406
406
406
3107
406
STIFFENER
283
110
482
110
635
635
110
3240
Chapter 2, Page 3 of 9
482
110
283
Shell
202d
ii)
iii)
Chapter 2, Page 4 of 9
iv)
v)
Head stock
vi)
Shell
202e
Corrosion
Members
i)
to
Underframe
Trough floor
repairs
ii)
Chapter 2, Page 5 of 9
Shell
2.2
Side buffers.
Plywood/compreg and PVC
flooring.
end partition and electrical
wiring
draw gear assembly.
end portion of BP/FP in case
of air brake coaches.
3.
2. Sole bar
4.
2.1
Chapter 2, Page 6 of 9
Trough floor
203
203a
ROOF
Roof repairs
i)
Shell
255
50
28 0
50
VESTIBULE DOOR
2.5 SILL TOP ICF DRG. NO.
7.1.0802
2.5
5 00
746
1200
2.5
2.5
746
2.5
2692
140
11
11
324
SECTION A-A
8R
C
100
50
100
50
11
11
3
REFERENCE
B
25
15
15
HEAD STOCK
25
R.D.S.O
(C)
20
20
255
255
45
45
SECTION C-C
SECTION B-B
FIGURE 2.4
Chapter 2, Page 7 of 9
SKETCH 76026
203b
Shell
207
ii)
203c
204
209
210
206
Roof testing
All coaches after POH repairs should be
tested under water spray for roof leakage
before they are finally turned out from the
workshop. For this purpose, a fixture
designed to simulate monsoon conditions
should be provided in the workshop.
WATER
TANK
STRUCTURE
Chapter 2, Page 8 of 9
211
SUPPORT
212
214
GENERAL
214a
213
Lifting shop
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Shell
EOT cranes
Trestles for coach
body
Inspection torches
Spiked hammers
Ball peen hammers
Goggles
for
inspection staff
Measuring tape
Measuring scale
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Chapter 2, Page 9 of 9
EOT cranes
Trestles for coach
body
Gas cutting plants
Multi-operator
welding plants
CO2 Welding plant
Electrical
angle
grinders
Pneumatic
hand
grinders
Component painting
equipment
Phosphating plant
214b
214c
Body panels.
End walls
Windows walls
Schedule 'B'
*****
Bogie
CHAPTER 3
BOGIES
301
GENERAL
302b
303
BOGIE ASSEMBLY
(see figure 3.1)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Description
Parameters
Maximum Axle
load bearing
capacity
Wheel base
Wheel diameter
(New)
Axle guidance
16.25t, 13t
Primary
suspension
Secondary
suspension
Shock absorbers
Transfer of
coach body
weight
2896mm
915mm
Telescopic axle guide
with oil damping
Coil spring
Coil spring
i)
Vertical dashpot in
primary suspension.
ii) Hydraulic double
acting vertical
shock absorber in
secondary
suspension.
Through bogie side
bearer pitched at
1600mm.
302
302a
The
bogies
being
currently
manufactured by ICF/RCF which
have been accepted as standards of
the Indian Railways and are of an all
welded light weight construction.
Axles are located on the bogie by
telescopic dash pot and axle guide
assemblies. Helical coil springs are
used in both the primary and the
secondary stages. The axle guide
device provides viscous damping
across
primary
springs
while
hydraulic dampers are provided
across the secondary stage. Dampers
are protected against misalignment by
resilient fittings. Isolation of vibration
is effected by rubber pads in primary
and secondary suspension.
Chapter 3, Page 1 of 36
Bogie
SECONDARY SUSPENSION
SAFETY STRAP
BOLSTER SUSPENSIONPHANGER
LOWER SPRING BEAM
BRAKE BLOCK
BRAKE BEAM
CENTRE PIVOT
ANCHOR LINK
2364
BOGIE FRAME
3950
EQUALISING STAY
WHEEL AXLE
BOGIE BOLSTER
SIDE BEARER
I.C.F. BOGIE
FIGURE 3.1
Chapter 3, Page 2 of 36
Bogie
New
size
10 mm
CENTRE PIVOT
ARRANGEMENT
The centre pivot pin joins the body
with the bogie and transmits the
tractive and braking forces on the
Chapter 3, Page 3 of 36
Shop renewal
size
9 mm
Condemning
size
8.5 mm
310
Shop renewal
size
43.5 mm
Condemning size
42 mm
ANCHOR LINKS
The floating bogie bolster which
supports the coach body is held in
position longitudinally by the anchor
links which are pinned to the bolster
sides and the bogie Transoms. One
anchor link is provided on each side
of the bolster diagonally across. The
links can swivel universally to permit
the bolster to rise and fall and sway
side wards. They are designed to take
the tractive and braking forces. The
anchor links are fitted with silent
block bushes (see figure 3.5)
SPRINGS
In ICF bogie, helical springs are used
in both primary and secondary
suspension.
The springs are
manufactured from peeled and
centreless ground bar of chrome
vanadium/chrome molybdenum steel
conforming to STR No. WD-01-HLS94 (Rev.1)
308
307
SIDE BEARERS
311
SILENT BLOCK
This is a synthetic rubber bush fitted
in anchor link and center pivot of ICF
bogies to transmit force without shock
and reduce noise.
Bogie
1
2
1. SPECIAL SEREW WITH
SEALING WASHER
2. GUIDE
3. PROTECTIVE TUBE COMPLETE
7. DUST SHIELD
8. HELICAL SPRING
9. GUIDE RING
OIL LEVEL
UNDER TARE
40
12. CIRCLIP
X TO RAIL LEVEL
92.5
142.5
11
104
10
12
13
X TO RAIL LEVEL-
14
15
16
Chapter 3, Page 4 of 36
Bogie
1
2
1. SPECIAL SEREW WITH
SEALING WASHER
2. GUIDE
3. PROTECTIVE TUBE COMPLETE
7. DUST SHIELD
8. HELICAL SPRING
9. GUIDE RING
10. RUBBER PACKING RING
OIL LEVEL
UNDER TARE
66.5
119.5
88
11
ASSEMBLING
X TO RAIL LEVEL
10
40
12
13
17
14
15
16
Chapter 3, Page 5 of 36
Bogie
SECTION A-A
TO BE TACK WELDEDPAFTER
ASSEMBLY
CENTRE PIVOT
PIN
SEALING CAP
BOGIE BOLSTER
SILENT BLOCK
SLEEVE
HEX. HEAD SCREWP& SPRING
WASHER
BOTTOM COVER
PCOMPLETE
COTTER
SPLIT PIN
A
CENTRE PIVOT ARRANGEMENT
FIGURE 3.3
Chapter 3, Page 6 of 36
%
%
c
Bogie
45
10
R1
9.5
5
13 %
%
c
FELT
OIL LEVEL
CHECK FOR POROUS WELDING
WEARING PIECE
Note:-P1. Bronze Wearing Piece should be renewed when the wear on the mating surface reaches
3mm that is, height is less than 42 mm or damages occur to the oil grooves.P2. The hard ground
plate should be renewed when the wear exceeds 1.5mm that is, thickness is less than 8.5 mm or
ridges are observed on the plate.
Chapter 3, Page 7 of 36
Bogie
312a
312
BRAKE RIGGING
Brake rigging is provided to control
the speed of the coach by transferring
the braking force from the brake
cylinder to the wheel tread. Brake
rigging can be divided into two
groups i.e. Bogie mounted brake
rigging and coach under frame
mounted brake rigging.
Coach Under
Brake Rigging
Mounted
Chapter 3, Page 8 of 36
Frame
Bogie
Table 3.3
Sr.No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Description
Brake Head & block complete (L.H. Assembly)
Brake Head & block complete (R.H. Assembly )
Short lever
Long lever
Brake Block Hanger
Adjusting link
Lever Hanger
Pull rod
Pull rod
Pin
Washer
Split Cotter
Pin
Washer
Split Cotter
Pin for lever Hanger
Pin for safety wire rope
Plain washer M20
Split cotter
Brake beam
Safety wire rope
Safety straps fixing Arrangement
Quantity
8
8
12
8
16
2
16
4
2
50
50
50
8
24
8
16
32
32
32
8
16
8
In 13 t axle load bogie the four lever used in bogie brake rigging are each with lever ratio of
1:1 and hence the total Mechanical advantage in a bogie is 4.
The components details of 13 t bogie are given in table 3.4 (Refer ICF drawing No. T-3-2601).
Table 3.4
Sr.No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Description
Brake Head & block complete
Brake Beam
Long lever
Short lever
Pull rod
Pull rod
Adjusting Link
Lever Hanger
Safety Strap
Safety Strap
Pin
Pin
Hex head screw " BSWx 38
Spring Washer M-12
Hex. Nut BSW
Washer
Washer
Pin for lever Hanger
Split cotter
Chapter 3, Page 9 of 36
Quantity
16
8
8
8
4
2
2
16
4
4
8
50
64
64
64
50
24
16
50
i)
TYPE OF COACH
BUILDER
POWER CAR TO
WLRRM6-9-0-601
HIGH CAPACITY
POWER CAR
ii)
Bogie
% OF BRAKING
ICF
TARE WEIGHT IN
TONNES
53.7
ICF
60
105.6
118
TYPE OF COACH
WGACCW
WGACCN
WGSCZAC
WGFAC
WGFSCZAC
BUILDER
ICF
RCF
RCF
ICF
ICF
ICF
% OF BRAKING
114.8
120.9
118.6
123.7
119.5
118.8
Size
282 x 205
2.
245 X 178
iii)
Shape/Drg.
Drawing no.
SK-93373
& SK-93371
-DO-
Sr. No.
1.
Size
230 X 230
2.
200 X 200
TYPE OF COACH
GENERAL SECOND
CLASS
SECOND DAY COACH
SLEEPER
FIRST CLASS
SLR
SCNLR
PANTRY CAR
Chapter 3, Page 10 of 36
Shape/Drg.
BUILDER
ICF
RCF
ICF
RCF
ICF
RCF
ICF
ICF
RCF
ICF
ICF
Drawing no.
SK-93372
-DO-
-DO-
% OF BRAKING
120
115.5
116.7
115.8
109.3
109.5
103.3
106.4
108.0
105.3
104.6
178
205
178
178
282
245
Bogie
245
245
2,8961
245
178
178
Chapter 3, Page 11 of 36
205
178
2,8961
282
245
245
FIGURE 3.7
312b
Bogie
Bogie brake rigging has been modified to incorporate a total mechanical advantage of 7.644
per bogie for non-ac coaches and 8.40 per bogie for ac coaches.
The components of bogie mounted air brake (16 t bogie) to ICF drawing no. WTAC4-3-3-401
is given in table 3.5.
Table 3.5
Sr.No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Description
Brake Head & block complete (LH)
Brake Head & Block complete (RH)
Brake beam
Safety wire rope
Lever
Lever
Lever Hanger
Pull rod
Brake block Hanger
Pin
Plain Washer
Split cotter
Pin
Plain Washer
Pin
Pin for lever Hanger
Pin for Safety wire rope
Pin Washer M 20
Split cotter
Quantity
8
8
8
16
8
8
8
8
16
44
64
52
4
4
4
16
32
32
32
The components of bogie mounted air brake (13 t bogie) to ICF drawing no. T-3-2-801 is
given in table 3.6
Table 3.6
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Description
Brake Head & block complete (L.H. Assembly)
Brake Head & block complete (R.H. Assembly )
Brake beam
lever
lever
lever Hanger
Pull rod
Brake block Hanger
Pin
Plain Washer
Split Cotter
Pin
Plain Washer
Pin
Pin for lever Hanger
Pin for safety wire rope
Plain washer M20
Split cotter
Safety wire rope
Chapter 3, Page 12 of 36
Quantity
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
8
22
32
26
2
2
2
8
16
16
16
8
i)
Bogie
AC COACHES WITH BOGIE MOUNTED AIR BRAKE CYLINDER (refer figure 3.10)
Levers
Sr.
No.
1.
Size
366 x 174
2.
3.
Shape/Drg.
Drawing no.
SK-98032
311 X 148
WGSCZAC, WGSCWAC,
WGFAC, WGFSCZ, WSCZAC,
WSCWAC, WFAC, WCBAC
-DO-
412
-DO-
-DO-
TYPE OF COACH
WGSCZAC
WGSCWAC
WGFAC
WGFSCZ
WSCZAC
WSCWAC
WFAC
WCBAC
-DO-
% OF BRAKING
40.56
39.66
41.41
41.33
42.26
41.83
44.73
43.14
ii) NON - AC COACHES WITH BOGIE MOUNTED AIR BRAKE CYLINDER (refer figure 3.11)
Levers
Sr.
No.
1.
Size
Shape/Drg.
302 X 158
SK-98027
2.
256 X 134
-DO-
-DO-
3.
405
-DO-
-DO-
TYPE OF COACH
GS
SCN
SDC
WCB
SLR
WFC
Chapter 3, Page 13 of 36
Drawing no.
% OF BRAKING
52.23
50.08
51.52
46.54
46.32
44.99
31 1
148
412
174
14 8
174
Bogie
36 6
412
31 1
36 6
28961
256
13 4
158
13 4
158
405
30 2
405
256
302
FIGURE 3.10
2,8961
FIGURE 3.11
Chapter 3, Page 14 of 36
313
Bogie
316a
EQUALISING STAYS
This device has been provided on
bogies between the lower spring
plank and the bolster to prevent
lateral thrust on the bolster springs
which have not been designed to take
the lateral forces. These links have
pin connections at both ends and,
therefore,
can
swivel
freely.
(see figure 3.13)
314
316b
Hydraulic
shock absorbers with
capacity of 600 kg at a speed of 10
cm/sec. are fitted to work in parallel
with the bolster springs to provide
damping for vertical oscillations.
WORKSHOP
BOGIE SHOP
MAINTENANCE-
MAINTENANCE OF BOGIES
(Flow Diagram)
LIFTING
SHOP
WASHING
PLANT
BOGIE
SHOP
SERVICE
SHOPS
(Fitting shop
&
Smith shop)
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Coach lifting
Bogie cleaning
Bogie dismantling
Component cleaning
Attention to components
Repair of components
Bogie assembly
Load testing and adjustment
Lowering of coach
Final adjustment
Figure 3.12
Chapter 3, Page 15 of 36
ii)
Dismantling
i)
SHOCK ABSORBERS
316
i)
315
Washing Plant
Bogie
6
2
3
3
1
5
134
526
67
200
263
3
3
3
3
672
ITEM
Chapter 3, Page 16 of 36
3.13
RIB 120x30x5
RIB 200x225x5
2
2
FIGURE
Description &
dimensions
1
1
Bogie
COMPONENTS
SIZE-NEW
CONDEMNING
9.5
WEAR IN mm
1.5
8.50
PIN
37
35.5
38.4
36.5
1.5
36.00
9.5
R1
26
HANGER
0.25P-
450.5
FIGURE
Chapter 3, Page 17 of 36
3.14
1.5
37.00
316c
Bogie
ii)
v)
vi)
13t bogies
16.25t bogies
1400
1.0 mm (700
0.5 mm
from longitudinal center-line)
2159 1.0 mm
2573 1.0 mm
570
1.0 mm (equidistant from
center-line of axle)
2159
1.0 mm
3612
1.0 mm
463
1.0 mm
1500
1.0 mm (750
0.5 mm
from longitudinal center-line)
2159 1.0 mm
2629 1.0 mm
570 1.0 mm (equidistant from
center-line of axle)
2159
1.0 mm
3612
1.0 mm
413
1.0 mm
870
1.0 mm (equidistant
from center-line of axle)
870
1.0mm (equidistant from
center-line of the axle)
Chapter 3, Page 18 of 36
Bogie
a
DIMENSIONAL
CHECK REPORT
C
35
D
z
413
+
- 1
+ 1
-
1752
1752
+
- 0.5
g4
+
- 1
P
c
g 8
1500
g 7
2896
+
- 0.5
570
750
876
C.L. OF AXLE
C.L.OF AXLE
+
- 0.5
876
+ 1
-
35
g3
+ 0.5
-
+ 1
-
+ 1
-
2159
2
61
29
26
g2
876
F
E
g 1
d
g 6
+
- 0.5
+ 1
-
g 5
z
+ 1
-
+
- 1
570
+ 1
-
A
1.
BOGIE SIDE FRAME & HEAD STOCK CENTRES ON EITHER SIDE OF THE BOGIE
FRAME AS SHOWN
TO
1 g
REPRESENT
LOCATIONS OF BOGIE GUIDES.
8
3.
SUSPENSION ARRGT.
4.
+
0.5mm
FROM THE TRANSVERSE CENTRE LINE PUNCH MARKS ON BOGIE
-
6.
FIGURE-3.15a
Bogie
Measuring
Point
E -F
Nominal Size
(mm)
Actual Size
(mm)
Variation
(mm)
G -H
1500 1.0
J-K
876 0.5
E -G
2159 1.0
L-M
876 0.5
F -H
2159 1.0
M-N
876 0.5
E -H
2629 1.0
O-P
876 0.5
F -G
2629 1.0
P- Q
876 0.5
413 1.0
R-S
876 0.5
413 1.0
S-T
876 0.5
413 1.0
I-K
1752 1.0
413 1.0
L-N
1752 1.0
g1 - g2
570 1.0
O-Q
1752 1.0
g3 - g4
570 1.0
R-T
1752 1.0
g5 - g6
570 1.0
g1 - g6
3612 1.0
g7 - g8
570 1.0
g2 - g5
3612 1.0
z -F
750 0.5
g3 - g8
3612 1.0
z -H
750 0.5
g4 - g7
3612 1.0
Actual Size
(mm)
Variation
(mm)
876 0.5
Figure - 3.15b
SHEET 2 OF 2
Nominal Size
(mm)
1500 1.0
Measuring
Point
I-J
Bogie
a
DIMENSIONAL
CHECK REPORT
FOR NON AC
BOGIE FRAME
C
35
D
z
463
+ 1
-
+
- 1
+
- 1
1752
1752
+ 0.5
-
g4
c
g 8
g 7
2896
700
+ 0.5
-
1400
+
- 1
BOGIE SIDE FRAME & HEAD STOCK CENTRES ON EITHER SIDE OF THE BOGIE
FRAME AS SHOWN
TO
1 g
3.
REPRESENT
LOCATIONS OF BOGIE GUIDES.
8
SUSPENSION ARRGT.
4.
+
0.5mm
FROM THE TRANSVERSE CENTRE LINE PUNCH MARKS ON BOGIE
-
6.
FIGURE-3.16a
+
- 0.5
+
- 1
+
- 1
1.
570
d
g6
z
+ 1
-
570
876
C.L. OF AXLE
C.L. OF AXLE
+
- 0.5
876
+ 1
-
35
73
25
g 3
+
- 0.5
+ 1
-
+ 1
-
2159
g2
g 1
12
36
876
F
E
R.D.S.O./CARR./SK93280
SHEET 1 OF 2
g 5
Bogie
Measuring
Point
E -F
Nominal Size
(mm)
Actual Size
(mm)
Variation
(mm)
G -H
1400 1.0
J-K
876 0.5
E -G
2159 1.0
L-M
876 0.5
F -H
2159 1.0
M-N
876 0.5
E -H
2573 1.0
O-P
876 0.5
F -G
2573 1.0
P- Q
876 0.5
463 1.0
R-S
876 0.5
463 1.0
S-T
876 0.5
463 1.0
I-K
1752 1.0
463 1.0
L-N
1752 1..0
g1 - g2
570 1.0
O-Q
1752 1.0
g3 - g4
570 1.0
R-T
1752 1.0
g5 - g6
570 1.0
g1 - g6
3612 1.0
g7 - g8
570 1.0
g2 - g5
3612 1.0
z -F
700 0.5
g3 - g8
3612 1.0
z -H
700 0.5
g4 - g7
3612 1.0
Actual Size
(mm)
Variation
(mm)
876 0.5
Figure - 3.16b
SHEET 2 OF 2
Nominal Size
(mm)
1400 1.0
Measuring
Point
I-J
x)
Bogie
Table 3.8
WEAR LOCATIONS (Dimensions in mm)
Part name
Wear location
Brake hanger bracket bush
32 H7 Hole +0.025/-0.00
Brake hanger bracket
Brake hanger bracket
Axle guide
Axle guide
BSS bracket bush
Pin for BSS
Bracket for anchor link
Brake lever hanger bracket
35 gap
C.D.1752 +1.0
115g6 -0.034/+0.00 diameter
120 diameter
38 dia. Hole
37 diameter
25+0.021/-0.0 slot
32 dia hole
316d
Drg. Nos.
T-0-3-669 &
WTAC3-0-3-316
T-0-3-675
T-0-3-675
T-0-3-670 alt. 2/f
T-0-3-670 alt. 2/f
T-0-3-626 alt. 9/h
T-0-5-637 alt. m/12
T-0-3-635 alt. j/16
T-0-3-631 &
T-0-3-632
Attention
to
Bogie
Bolster
Arrangement
(Refer drg. no.WTAC3-0-5-301 &
WLRRM-0-4-001 for 16.25t bogie and
T-0-5-601 & T-0-4-601 for 13t bogie)
i) Check the bolster for twist,
crack, corrosion, etc. Repair or
replace the bolster as required,
and attend to the lug as required.
ii) Repair or replace the equalising
stay bracket if found bent,
damaged, or corroded.
Table 3.9
Part name
Side bearer wearing plate
Drg. Nos.
T-0-5-648
10/L
T-0-5-649
17/h
T-0-6-606
T-0-6-606
T-0-6-611
16/p
-do-doT-0-6-602
(w)
alt
alt
alt.
alt.s
Part name
Anchor link silent block pin
Anchor link silent block
Anchor link housing
Bogie
Anchor Link
(Ref: Drawing No. T 0 7 603
and T 0 7 607)
i)
ii)
Table 3.10
(all dimensions in mm)
Wear location
25 mm -0.012/-0.052, thick ends
Outer dia. 90.5 +0.05/+0.025
Hole dia 90.5 +0.015/ -0.03
Drg. No.
RDSO-Sketch-94101 alt.1
RDSO-Sketch-94101 alt.1
T-0-7-605
316f
Bogie
i)
Table 3.11
Wear Location (Dimensions in mm)
Part name
Wear location
Pins for 16.25t axle
Dia.31 (+0.5/-0.2)
load bearing capacity
equalising stay
Pins For 13t axle load
Dia. 24 (+0.2/-0.1)
bearing capacity
equalising stay
316g
ii)
Table 3.12
(all dimensions in mm)
Part name
Wear
Drg. No.
location
BSS bracket Hole 38 H11 WLRRM(+0.16/-0.00)
0-5-002
bush
Eq.
Stay Hole 42 H7 WLRRM bracket
(+0.025/-0.0)
0-4-002
316h
BSS Hanger
(Ref: Drawing No. T 0 5 639)
i)
Bogie
Table 3.13
(all dimensions in mm)
Part name
BSS hanger
BSS hanger
BSS hanger
Hanger block
Hanger block
BSS pin
316i
316j
Wear location
distance between horizontal wearing arms 384
thickness of vertical arm 25.5
horizontal wearing surface 42
Thickness - 9.5
slot 29 (+0.4/-0.2)
29 (+0/-0.1)
ii.
Critical Dimensions
(dimensions in mm)
Component
Dimension
Drg. no.
Lower
hole 140 H7 RDSO Skspring seat
(+0.04/-0.0)
90005 Alt.2
Guide bush
O.D. 140 A9 RDSO SK(-0.3/-0.6)
84102 Alt.5
Guide bush
hole dia 115 -do(+0.15/-0)
Guide Ring
hole 115 H7 -do(+0.04/-0)
iii. Replace the lower spring seat if
worn, cracked, scored, etc.
Drg. Nos.
T-0-5-639
-do-doT-0-5-638
-doT-0-5-637
COIL SPRINGS
i.
Bogie
Table 3.15
Drawing code of springs for ICF BG coaches
(Reference RDSO Amendment slip no. 5 of September 2001 to STR WD-01-HLs- 94
(Rev.1 May 95)
Type of spring
Axle box
Bolster
Type of bogies
ICF Drg. No
Drg. Code
No.
A01
F-0-1-006
WTAC-0-1-202
A03
Power car
WLRRM2-0-1-202
A04
Double decker
DD-0-1-001
A06
WLRRM8-0-1-802
A09
RDSO /SK-98017
A10
F-0-5-002
B01
WTAC-0-5-202
B03
Power car
WLRRM2-0-5-202
B04
Double decker
DD-0-5-003
WLRRM8-0-5-802
RDSO /SK-98018
B06
B11
B13
B15
B16
Bolster
Table 3.16
Load deflection testing and grouping of Axle box spring (B.G Main line coaches)
Code
Wire
dia
Free
height
Test
Load
Acceptable
height under
test load
Yellow
Oxford
Blue*
Green
A01
33.5
360
2000
279-295
279-284
285-289
290-295
A03
33.5
375
2800
264-282
264-269
270-275
276-282
A04
35
372
3000
265-282
265-270
271-276
277-282
A06
36
337
2400
269-284
269-273
274-279
280-284
A09
37
360
3000
277-293
277-282
283-288
289-293
276-279
280-284
285-289
A10
39
315
1800
276-289
* As per RDSO's letter no. MC/SPG dated 25.7.01
Bogie
Table 3.17
Load deflection testing and grouping of Bolster spring
(B.G Main line coaches)
Code
Wire
dia
Free
height
Test
Load
Acceptable
height under
test load
A
Yellow
B01
42
385
3300
301-317
B03
42
400
4800
291-308
B04
47
400
6100
286-304
B06
36
416
4200
280-299
B11
47
*386
6700
306-322
B13
34
B15
40
393**
6000
256-272
B16
32.5
286 **
* Combined load deflection test is done
** As per RDSO's letter no. MC/MV dtd. 21.11.01
# As per RDSO's letter no. MC/SPG dtd. 25.7.01
v.
vi.
Colour code
Yellow
Oxford Blue
Green
318
301-305
291-296
286-291
280-286
B
Oxford
Blue #
306-311
297-303
292-297
287-292
C
Green
312-317
304-308
298-304
293-299
306-311
312-317
318-322
256-261
262-267
268-272
ii.
v.
vi.
319
BOGIE ASSEMBLY
319a
General
Bogie
319c
ii.
Guide
i.
ii.
ii.
Bogie
vi.
a. Servoline
- 100 of
IOC b. Yantrol
- 100
of HPC c. Bharat univol
100 of BPC
iii. For obtaining correct buffer
height when the coach body is
lowered on the bogies, while
assembling the bogie hard
rubber, UHMWPE or NFTC
packing of required thickness,
depending
on
the
wheel
diameter, should be provided
under the flanges of the lower
spring seats. Packing rings of
thickness as given in table 3.18
and as shown in figure 3.17
(RDSO sketch 77354) should be
used. Compensating rings of
suitable thickness as per
suspension diagram for relevant
coach should be placed over the
flange of the lower spring seat.
Table 3.18
Average tread
diameter of two
wheel sets of bogie
889 to 864 mm
863 to 840 mm
839 to 820 mm
819 mm
iv.
Thickness of
hard packing
ring
13 mm
26 mm
38 mm
48 mm
x.
Bogie
DIMENSION `A'
AS SHOWN BELOW
TYPE OF COACH
GS,SDC,SLR,SCN
+0
43
-3
WCB,WCBAC,WFC,WFAC
WGFAC,WSCWAC,WGCWAC
WGACCN,WACCN,WSCZAC
WGSCZAC,WFCZAC,WLRRM
CROWN
CLEARANCE
A
mm
FIGURE 3.17
27
+0
-3
Bogie
LIFTING SHOP
319e
100 of IOC
Yantrol
100 of HPC
319f
Shock Absorbers
Reference may be made to RDSO
specification C-8703 (Rev.1) for
hydraulic shock absorbers for
coaching stock.
1. Periodicity of overhaul
i) Schedule overhaul: Shock
absorbers should be given a
schedule overhaul:
a.
b.
Testing
i) The shock absorber is tested
on the special purpose
machine (RDSO sketch nos.
69.2.04.00 to 69.2.04.08)
which can measure its
capacity in both tension and
compression by developing
the resisting force at a
velocity of 10 cm/sec. The
length of the shock absorber
and its stroke should be
within the limits specified in
the table 3.19.
ii) The shock absorber must be
tested at every POH and
reused if overhauling is not
due and the capacity is
within 20%. A register
should be maintained in the
shock
absorber
section
wherein the test results of
each shock absorber should
be recorded before the shock
absorber is certified fit for
use on coaches.
iii) After the testing and
certification, the protection
cover of the shock absorber
should be pressed into
position on the piston rod
disc and spot welded at six
points around the periphery.
iv) The shock absorber should
then be extended on the
mounting fixture and painted.
When the paint dries, it
should be compressed and
then removed from the
fixture.
v) The date of testing, the date
of overhauling and the name
of the shop where overhauled
should invariably be stamped
on the name plate of the
shock absorber before it is
sent for fitment.
Bogie
Table 3.19
Compressed
Nominal
Extended
Nominal
Stroke
(mm)
250 3
320 3
360 3
110
Length (mm)
Makers Type
Variation from
Nominal
Min.
Max.
(mm)
(mm)
320
FITTING SHOP
WASHING PLANT
Bosch tank
Hot water jet system
Bins and pallets
Jib crane
Fork lift
Platform truck
BOGIE SHOP
Ball peen hammer
Chisel
Spanner set
Welding transformer
Gas cutting plant
Bogie alignment gauges
Spring testing machine
Magnaflux crack detector
Paint brushes
Floor scraper
Bogie frame repair fixture
Bolster repair fixture
Bogie test rig
Working stands
Overhead crane
Bins and pallets
Fork lift
Platform truck
SMITH SHOP
Helical spring repair tools &
plant
Shot peening plant
Heat treatment plant
Smiths tongs, hammers &
blocks
-70
40
321
Bogie
321b
Primary Suspension
i) Primary/Secondary Examination
Bogie Frame
i)
Primary/Secondary
Examination, Schedule A &
B Examination
Visually examine
clearance
axle
box
ii)
Brake hanger
damages.
brackets
iii)
for
321c
Schedule C
Secondary Suspension
i)
Primary/Secondary
Examination, Schedule A, B &
C examination
ii)
Schedule C Examination
321d
Visually examine
stay rod brackets.
Examine
vertical
absorbers for damages.
Bogie
Equalising
321e
shock
Brake Rigging
i)
Primary / Secondary
Examination
Examine
brake
breakages/damages.
beams
ii)
Schedule A, B & C
Examination
322
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Bogie
Annexure - 3.1
COMMON DEFECTS FOUND IN AXLE GUIDE ASSEMBLY
S.No.
Defects
Reason
1.
Perished
rubber
packing ring
2.
1)
Misaligned fitment
of axle guides to
bogie frame.
2) Dust ingress to
lower spring seat.
3.
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
4.
5
6.
1)
2)
7
8.
9
10
Axle guide is
hitting
lower
spring seat
Weld joint of
lower spring seat
and tube is porous
or cracked
Remedies
1)
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
******
CHAPTER 4
INTRODUCTION
403a
403
403b
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION OF
TWIN PIPE GRADUATED RELEASE
AIR BRAKE SYSTEM (See figure 4.1)
vent type
The
control
reservoir
is
disconnected from the brake
pipe.
vent type
Figure 4.1 SCHEMATIC LAYOUT OF TWIN PIPE GRADUATED REL EASE AIR BRAKE SYSTEM
Note: Pressure gauges are installed only in guards brake van.
Chapter 4, Page 1 of 50
Table 4.1
406
Description
Minimum Brake
Application
Service Brake
Application
Full Service Brake
Application
Emergency Brake
Application
403c
INTERMEDIATE PIECE
(SANDWICH PIECE)
An intermediate piece is mounted on the
common pipe bracket to fit the distributor
valve on the common pipe bracket. The
intermediate piece serves the purpose of
blanking all the other ports on the
common pipe bracket other than required
for a particular make of distributor valve.
Each type of distributor valve is mounted
on the common pipe bracket with its own
intermediate piece.
0.8 to 1.0Kg/cm2
1.0 to 1.5Kg/cm2
Brake pipe is fully
exhausted and its
pressure reduces to
almost zero.
407
407a
404
Reduction in B. P.
Pressure
0.5 to 0.8Kg/cm2
Feed
Hoses
Chapter 4, Page 2 of 50
Pipe
407b
6a
Kg Cm
MR
MAIN RESERVOIR
ISOLATING COCK PRESSURE REDUCER
1a
2
6b
ISOLATING COCK
1b
Kg Cm
1c
EXHAUST COCK
11/4 BSP
SOCKET TO
COUPLE HOSE
COUPLING
NIPPLE END
6
FLEXIBLE HOSE
HIGH PRESSURE
(10 KG/CM2 CAL)
408a
Procedure
i)
Dismantling
ii)
Cleaning of Parts
iii)
Replacement of Parts
Chapter 4, Page 4 of 50
Assembly
Insert the two O rings in their
respective grooves on the stem.
408d
Test Bench
Compressor to build pressure upto
10 kg/cm2.
Single ended spanner as per IS 2027
a) Across face 17 (for M10 lock
nut) 1No.
b) Across Face 13 (for M8 studs) 2
No.
Screw Driver 300mm,1 No.
1 BSP dummy Plug with seal.
Dummy plug for angle cock.
Chapter 4, Page 5 of 50
iii)
Safety Precautions
409
409b
Sr.
No.
4.
5.
6.
7.
409c
3.
Description
Torque Wrench 0-3 Kg m range
Double End Spanner 24x27 mm
across face (For M16)
Double End Spanner across face
13x14 (For M12)
Chapter 4, Page 6 of 50
Description
409d
409g
409h
Chapter 4, Page 7 of 50
Replacement of Parts
409f
Cleaning of Parts
409e
409i
Testing of
figure 4.6)
i)
Brake
Cylinder
(see
Ref. No. of
Isolating cock
1a
1b
1c
1d
1e
1f
Description
Supply angle cock
Angle cock
Angle cock
Angle cock
Exhaust cock
Angle cock
No. of
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ref. No. of
Pressure Reducing valve
2a
2b
2c
2d
3
4
5
Pressure Gauge
6a
6b
Description
No. of
Set on 10 kg/cm 2
Set on 6 kg/cm2
Set on 0.8 kg/cm 2
Set on 3.8 kg/cm 2
Pipe line filter
Brake Cylinder pressure
mounting base
Air reservoir
1
1
1
1
1
1
Supply Pressure
Brake Cylinder Pressure
1
1
Strength test
Pressure Tightness Test.
For
strength
test,
procedure
described below should be follow:
Chapter 4, Page 8 of 50
v)
Chapter 4, Page 9 of 50
410
410a
410b
a)
b)
c)
410c
Spanner 19 x 22mm
Vice.
Screw Driver
Disassembly
ii)
Cleaning of Parts
Fig. 4.8
Chapter 4, Page 10 of 50
iv)
Assembly
Assemble body after smearing
grease.
Locate filter in position and
assemble top cover with new
gasket.
Fix hexagonal bolts/nuts along
with the spring washer.
Fix new sealing ring to the
bottom and assemble drain plug.
410d
ii)
Test Bench
Compressor, capable of building
air pressure up to 10 kg/sq. cm.
Double ended spanner (Across
Face 19x22) One No.
Dummy flange for dirt collector
2 nos.
Fig. 4.9 - TEST BENCH FOR ANGLE COCK, ISOLATING COCK, DIRT
COLLECTOR, CHECK VALVE AND GUARD'S EMERGENCY VAN VALVE
Chapter 4, Page 11 of 50
411
AUXILIARY RESERVOIR
(refer figure 4.10)
411a
SALIENT FEATURES
Note:
The dimension & tolerances of
the auxiliary reservoir shall be as
indicated in latest revision of RDSO
drawing number SK-96081.
411c
411b
iv) Assembly
Assemble the drain plug with washer by
screwing it back into its position
Chapter 4, Page 12 of 50
411d
412a
411e
412
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
GUARD'S EMERGENCY
VALVE (refer figure 4.11)
Salient Features
The guards emergency brake valve
consists of a housing in which a ball is
housed. The ball has a through hole
similar to the isolating cock. To the ball a
handle is fixed at the top. By operating the
handle the ball can be rotated along the
vertical axis. When the hole in the ball
gets aligned with the inlet and the exhaust
port the compressed air can pass through
the valve. However, for restricting the
flow of air a choke of 5mm is fitted in the
exhaust port for controlling the rate of BP
exhaust. The inlet port of the valve is
connected to the brake pipe. In case of an
emergency, the guard moves the handle of
the guards emergency brake valve so that
it is placed parallel to the inlet pipe. This
action causes the air from the brake pipe
to be exhausted to the atmospher e through
a choke of 5 mm. The drop in pressure in
the brake pipe can also be observed in the
air flow meter provided in the locomotive
cabin and the driver applies the brakes for
stopping the train. The handle of the
guards emergency brake valve has to be
reset manually to normal position before
the brake pipe pressure is recharged.
Note: The general design and controlling
dimension of guards emergency
valve shall conform to the latest
revision of RDSO drawing no SK73549.
The guard's emergency brake valve
should be completely dismantled and
overhauled in every POH.
BRAKE
412b
iv) Assembly
Test rig/stand
Spanner A/F 19/22.
Special spanner for removing thread
plug.
Spanner for removing gland.
Light hammer
Vice.
412d
412e
iii) Replacement of Parts
Chapter 4, Page 14 of 50
Safety Precautions
413
413a
Salient Features
(ii)
(iii)
Special Spanner
Straight Nose pliers (external)
(spring type)18 mm to 25 mmexternal
(iv) Bend nose pliers (internal) 25 -30
mm internal
(v)
Screw driver
(vi) Pipe vice & simple 6 vice
(vii) Open end spanner 11-13 mm.
(viii) Hand punches
(ix) Kerosene oil bath
(x)
Air jet gun
(xi) SAB test bench
A1
A1
A
A
Note: The Slack Adjuster takes up100 mm per braking. Dimension A1 will be 98 + 1/-4 mm (refer G-92)
413c
413e
Ensure
that
no
foreign
matter/particle remain inside the sub assemblies during re-assembly.
Description
of spring
Part
No.
1.
Barrel spring
2.
413f
Minimum
permissible force
21
Spring
length
compression
330 mm
Pay out
spring
11
100 mm
3.
Take out
spring
37
4.
Clutch
sprin g
39
140 kg
Safety Precautions
58 Kg.
a)
21.5 mm
22 Kg.
b)
38 mm
300 Kg.
i) Pay-in test
413d
Lubrication
After cleaning and inspection all parts of
slack adjuster should be coated with semifluid grease SERVOGEM -RR3 or
MALMEROL MULTIGREASE LL3
(refer G-92) before undertaking reassembly.
Chapter 4, Page 16 of 50
ii)
Pay-out test
413g
Painting
The slack adjuster is given a coat of
anticorrosive paint, excluding the adjuster
tube.
Note : The unthreaded portion of the
adjuster spindle should not have a
thick coating.
413h
(ii)
(ii)
(iii)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
For e dimension
(i)
Chapter 4, Page 18 of 50
413i
Safety Precautions
414
DISTRIBUTOR VALVE
415
415a
414a
i.
Main body
ii. Quick Service valve
iii. Main valve
iv. Limiting device
v.
Double release valve
vi. Auxiliary reservoir check valve
vii. Cut off valve
viii. Application choke
ix. Release choke.
Operation of C3w Distributor Valve
(Refer Fig 4.14)
For effective functioning of the air brake
system, the distributor valve has to
operate effectively during
i)
ii)
iii)
Charging stage
Application stage and
Release stage
i) Charging Stage
During charging stage the compressed air
flows from the brake pipe and enters into
the brake pipe chamber of the main valve,
cut off valve and quick service valve. Due
to this pressure the various valves get,
activated and perform as under.
Main Valve : Due to brake pipe pressure
acting on top face of the large diaphragm,
differential pressure acts on the main
valve. As a result the hollow stem moves
downwards there by connecting brake
cylinder to atmosphere. (shown by arrow
in figure 4.14)
In addition to this because of BP pressure
at top of large diaphragm it presses ring
and trigger. This action unlocks the CR
release valve by raising upward the
locking rod.
Cut Off Valve : As brake pipe pressure
enters into the cut off valve it flows
through the solex jet and valve, (which is
held open due to action of BP pressure on
bottom side of the lower diaphragm) to
the control reservoir. As the CR & BP
pressure equalises, diaphragm assembly
come down and valve reach to lap
position. The control reservoir pressure
now also reaches to the upper portion of
top diaphragm of quick service valve and
the bottom portion of large diaphragm of
main valve.
ii)
Application Stage
EMERGENCY APPLICATION
During emergency application the brake
pipe pressure is reduced rapidly to
0 kg/cm2 by the driver's brake valve.
Because of this drop the position of the
various valves will be as described below.
Main valve:
With drop in
BP
pressure to 0 kg/cm2 differential pressure
acts across the large diaphragm. As a
result the hollow stem is moved in upward
direction and pushes the check valve there
by opening the passage for entry of
auxiliary reservoir pressure at top portion
of main valve. This pressure then gets a
way to brake cylinder through limiting
device. The brake cylinder thus gets
charged with the compressed air. This
pressure is known as BC-pressure.
Limiting Device: The auxiliary reservoir
pressure which entered into the top
position of main valve now enters the
GRADUATED APPLICATION
During graduated brake application the
brake pipe pressure is dropped in steps by
driver's brake valve. The movement of
various valve assemblies is almost in the
same direction as during emergency
application, but their movement is
comparatively less. In the main valve
however after each application the hollow
stem assumes the lap position with the
check valve.
415b
Periodicity of Overhauling
The overhauling of the distributor valve is
carried out once in five years or on
completion of 8 lakh km whichever is
earlier or if there is some specific trouble.
415c
Overhauling
C3W Distributor Valve consists of
various sub-assemblies possessing highly
finished, accurate and sophisticated small
parts and therefore need a well arranged
work-shop equipped with standard tools
415e
Overhauling Procedure
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Description
415f
Open end spanners of
24-27 mm, 20-22 mm, 17-19 mm and
11-13 mm
Socket
wrenches
of
size
13mm,17mm,19mm, 22mm, 27mm &
32mm with driving handles
a. Simple L Shaped
b. Reversible ratchet and
c. Torque calibrated for (1.5 to 6
Kg.m) range
Ring spanner (32-36 mm)
Allen key (6 mm)
Circlip pliers internal & external both
(Small & Medium)
Plier general design and long nose
separately
Screw drivers
(5 mm and 8 mm blade sizes)
Nylon hammer
Special tools
1. SCT -6014-pin end tool
2. SCT -6016-pin end tool
3. SCT -6015-O ring set tool
4. SCT -6017-hollow stem-lead-tool
5. SCT -6026-spetula (bent tool)
6. SCT-6092-socket spanner
7. RPBF-0003-) fixture for holding
guide (76)
8. Air jet gun with flexible hose
Bench mounted DV - holding fixture
415g
Test Procedure
Tests are conducted in a particular
sequence for reducing the time required in
opening and closing of various valves. In
the test bench described above, following
test sequence is optimum as far as the
time required in testing distributor valves
are concerned. In any other type of test
bench arrangement, some other test
sequence may be optimum.
Testing of distributor valve is conducted
in two steps i.e. first for single pipe
operation
and then for twin pipe
operation. A distributor valve which is
able to pass tests for single pipe operation
requires only one or two more tests to
show its capability to operate in twin pipe
system.
i) Single Pipe operation.
V1 is kept closed during single pipe
operation. (Since V1 is the valve
which controls supply of air to the
feed pipe at 6 Kg/cm2).
b)
c)
d)
b)
c)
e)
f)
application
and
With
brake
pipe,
control
reservoir and auxiliary reservoir
(i.e. P3, P4 and P6) charged to 5
Kg/cm2. Move A9 handle to
emergency application position.
b)
b)
c)
d)
c)
Sensitivity test
a)
b)
c)
b)
c)
b)
c)
d)
Re-feeding test
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
d)
c)
d)
e)
b)
c)
ii)
c)
416
KE DISTRIBUTOR VALVE
416a
ii)
Application Stage
The application of brakes can either
be emergency, full service or
graduated.
Emergency application
When the brake pipe pressure is
reduced from 5kg/cm 2 to zero the
passage from auxiliary reservoir to
the brake pipe is closed by the sealing
flap in the 'R' charger, because of
differential pressure acting on either
side of the sealing flap. At the same
time pressure differential acts across
the large diaphragm of the three
pressure valve which pushes the
piston unit (large & small) upwards.
The upward movement of the piston
unit closes the outlet port by uplifting
of the control sleeve.
t
h
u
s
f
l
o
w
s
f
r
o
m
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
Figure 4.17 - KR DISTRIBUTOR VALVE (GRADUATED APPLICATION)
Chapter 4,, Page 28 of 50
416b
Overhauling procedure
416c
417
TEST REPORT
PROFORMA FOR C3W/KE DISTRIBUTOR VALVE
Type of Valve
Sr. No.
Table 4.6
Sr.
No.
1.
2.
3.
Description of Test
Results Required
OVERCHARGE PROTECTION
2)
3 to 5 seconds
3.8 +/- 0.1 Kg/cm2
No Leakage
15 to 20 Seconds
Overcharged CR should
come
to
regime
pressure of 5 Kg/cm2.
EMERGENCY APPLICATION
Single
pipe
3 to 5 Seconds
No Leakage
15 to 20 Seconds
0.6 Kg/cm2 in 6
Brake
should
start
applying within 1 Sec.
Brakes must
applied.
Observation
remain
Twin
Pipe
Sr.
No.
Description of Test
Results Required
Observation
REFEEDING
Create leak in BC through a 2 mm choke
GRADUATED APPLICATION
Decrease BP pressure in steps as below
BP Pressure (Kg/cm2)
4.8
4.6
4.4
4.2
4.0
3.8
3.6
Continue Graduated Application until max. BC
Pressure is obtained
BP Pressure at maximum brake application
BC pressure should
decrease initially but refeeding
should
be
available
and
BC
pressure should get
stabilized
at
some
pressure.
B.C Pressure
GRADUATED RELEASE
Increase BP pressure in steps as below
BP Pressure (Kg/cm2)
3.6
3.8
4.0
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
Check BP Pressure when BC pressure is 0.4 Kg/cm2
(Recharging pressure to release BC Fully)
QUICK RELEASE TEST
Apply emergency brake & pull briefly the double
release valve lever
CR check valve reset test. Start recharging of the
system
BC Pressure
418
419a
system
419b
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Overhauling
419c
Bench vice
Working table
Screw driver
Spanner 30 mm
Allen key for M6 and M8 Screw.
Open ended spanners -size 14 AF.
Disassembly
The passenger emergency alarm signal
device after removing from the coach
should be disassembled as follows:
419d
Cleaning of Parts
419e
ii.
iii.
iv.
Replacement of Parts
419f
v.
vi.
Assembly
B)
i.
To
assemble
the
passenger
emergency alarm signal device
(PEASD) follow the instruction for
disassembly in the reverse sequence.
Lubricate the pivot, roller and
moving parts and ensure smooth
operation of the components.
ii.
iii.
iv.
419g
Fig. 4.19
Leakage Test
Close cock (1b) and open cock (1a),
to apply air pressure of 10 kg/cm2 .
See that cock (1d) is closed.
See that pressure indicated by the
gauge (6a) stabilizes at 10 kg/cm2.
Use pressure regulator (2a), if
necessary, to adjust the pressure upto
10 kg/cm2.
Open cock (1c) and wait till the
pressure indicated by the gauges
(6a) and (6b) and (6c) stabilizes at
10 kg/sq.cm. Wait for a few more
minutes.
Check for leakage by applying soap
solution all over the body of the pull
off box or PEASD.
No leakage is permitted, close cock
1(a) and 1(c), open cock (1d) and
discharge the air pressure.
Functional Test
Close Cock (1d) and open cock
(1c).
Open cock (1b) and apply air
pressure of 5 kg/cm2 .
See that the pressure indicated by
the gauge (6a) stabilizes at 5
kg/cm2.
Use pressure regulator (2b) if
necessary to adjust the pressure
upto 5 kg/cm2 .
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
Figure 4.20
Chapter 4,, Page 33 of 50
connected
to
the
two
Passenger
Emergency Alarm Signal Device which
are situated at either side of one end wall
of the coach. PEASD'S are connected to
the Passenger Emergency Alarm Valve
PEAV through a 10mm control pipe. BP
pressure is fed to the PEAV through a
20mm branch pipe. In the event of alarm
chain pull air is depleted from the control
pipe connecting PEAV and PEASD
causing BP pressure to exhaust through
the 4mm choke in the PEAV. This causes
partial application of brakes.
This drop in pressure in the brake pipe
line is also observed in the flow meter
fitted in the locomotive for the driver to
stop the train.
420a
Overhauling of PEAV
For effective and reliable functioning
overhauling should be done every POH or
if there is any specific trouble.
420b
S.No
1.
2.
3.
4.
Description
Rotatory PEAV holding fixture clamped
on work bench
General tools
(A) D/E Spanner (11-13mm), (1419mm) and (32 -36mm)
(B) Socket Spanner with driving
handle (11,13,,19mm)
(C) Pipe wrench 250 mm
(D) Screw Driver (8 mm blade)
(E) Needle pokers (0.5, 0.8,1.0 dia)
(F) Blunt tool (for K-ring)
(G) Internal (long nose) circlip plier
Kerosene tank
Pin End Tool (suitable length and pin
size)
420c
Cleaning of parts
420e
420f
Assembly
420g
i)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
in
air
the
at
7.
B)
Electrical Test
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Charging
Open cock (1b) and charge the
reservoir up to 5 kg/cm2, using
pressure reducer (2b).
Open valve (1c) and charge the
PEAV up to 5kg/cm2.
Wait till gauges (6a) and (6b) and
(6c) are stabilized and show the
same pressure .
These gauges should show a
pressure of 5 kg/cm2 and if the
pressure is not equal to 5 kg/cm2,
adjust the pressure regulator.
In this position emergency brake
valve is charged.
Check leakage from exhaust port
`O of the PEASD, there should
not be any leak.
Indicating lamp (L) should be off
in this position.
Application
Apply a voltage of 110 V DC to
the circuit of the indicating lamp of
the PEAV as shown in the figure.
Pull the operating hook of the
signal device and observe that the
air pressure starts venting from
both the PEASD and the PEAV
from
their
exhaust
ports
continuously.
The lamp should glow.
The gauge (6b) should stabilize at
an intermediate reading to balance
between the inlet and the exhaust
rate of flow of the compressed air.
Reset the signal device with the
resetting key and note.
The venting of air pressure from
the exhaust of the signal device
should stop. It should also stop
from the exhaust of the PEAV and
the indication lamp should switch
off.
The gauge (6b) and (6c) should
start building up to 5 kg/sq. cm.
Now again check for leakage all
over the alarm valve, especially at
the exhaust port. No leakage is
permitted.
9.
10.
11.
12.
421
421b
421a
iii)
Replacement of Parts
Disassembly
iv) Assembly
422
422a
Procedure
i) Disassembly
iv) Assembly
422c
423.
Round
trip
examination
is
performed on a rake to ensure all
equipment and subassemblies of air
brake system are properly positioned
on each coach of the rake.
(ii). Round
trip
examination
is
performed before train leaves the
originating station.
(iii). The following maintenance attention
is given in the round trip
examination.
a). All worn out brake blocks are
changed.
b). All the brake rigging pins should
be intact and of correct size.
c). Dimension `A' of slack adjuster
is adjusted to the specified valve.
d). Hose couplings for brake pipe on
consecutive coaches are coupled
to one another.
e). Hose coupling for feed pipe on
consecutive coaches are coupled
to one another.
424.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Monthly Examination)
C.
B. The Manual Brake Release test is
carried out on every coach of the
rake, to ensure proper functioning of
the release lever, fitted below the
distributor valve .
C.
425
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE B
(Tri-monthly Examination)
The following maintenance work should
be attended during schedule B
A.
B.
C.
426
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Half yearly examination)
Chapter 4,, Page 39 of 50
D.
Annexure 4.1
POH KIT FOR C3W DISTRIBUTOR VALVE
(M/s. Stone India Ltd., SAB Wabco (I) Ltd., Greysham & Co.)
S.
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Description
Diaphragm
Diaphragm
Lip seal
O ring
Valve body assembly
O ring
O ring
O ring
O ring
O ring
O ring
Check valve
Check valve
Sealing ring
Seal
Diaphragm
Valve assembly
Jet valve assembly
Valve assembly
O ring
O ring
O ring
O ring
Valve
Valve assembly
Diaphragm
Seal
Valve assembly
Seal
'O' ring
'O' ring
'O' ring
Washer
Cap
'O' ring
Valve assembly
Main gasket
'O' ring
Filter
Filter
Chapter 4, Page 40
of 50
WABCO
Part No.
19185800
19184900
70581800
70523903
19022000
70524914
70501278
70513278
70513478
70501178
70481903
19187400
19187300
19187900
19196400
18301900
19194200
18988800
18988700
70521578
70521203
70525578
70525278
19011600
19011500
19189400
19191400
19191700
70516478
70516478
70512878
70509178
19192001
19192100
70037803
19192301
11746000
70503302
19184001
78768600
No. per
set
1
1
2
5
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Annexure 4.2
POH KIT FOR KPISL DISTRIBUTOR VALVE
(M/s. Escorts Ltd., Knorr Bremse (I) Pvt. Ltd.)
S.No.
Descripotion
Part No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Filter
Sealing ring
O ring
Diaphragm
Seal
Grooved ring
Seal
Sealing ring
Diaphragm
Valve head
Grooved ring
Flat sealing ring
Flat sealing ring
Sealing ring
Sealing ring
Flat sealing ring
Grooved ring
Valve head
K ring
Diaphragm
Fine filter
Flat sealing ring
Sealing ring
Fine filter
Sealing ring
Diaphragm
K ring
Grooved ring
Filter
Sealing ring
Flat sealing ring
Valve rod
Sealing cap
Flat sealing ring
Seal
Flat sealing ring
Valve tappet
Sealing ring
Seal
Toothed ring
Valve plate
Control sleeve
Valve plate
Supporting ring
4
5
12
16
19
25
26
27 or 90
31
33
35
36
42
44
46
47
49
65
54
69
72
75
77
82
85
99
101
103
118
120
127
129
133
140
142
148
149
170
174
57
10
53
56
55
Chapter 4, Page 41
of 50
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
3
4
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
1
Annexure 4.3
POH KIT FOR CUT OFF ANGLE COCK
(RDSO SK Wd 88123 . S.02 alt. 4)
S.
No.
1
2
3
4
Description
Drg. No.
RDSO SK
RDSO SK
RDSO SK
RDSO SK
Seat
O ring
O ring
Spring
Qty / kit
02
01
02
01
Description
Gasket
Filter
Washer
Drg. No.
Qty / kit
1
1 each
1
Description
Drg. No.
Seat ring
Sealing ring
Gland packing
Qty / kit
02
01
01
Description
Drg. No.
Qty / kit
01
01
Description
Sealing ring
Round cord ring
Round cord ring
Chapter 4, Page 42
of 50
Drg. No.
RDSO SK 98003 item 2
RDSO SK 98003 item 4
RDSO SK 98003 item 11
Qty / kit
01
01
01
ANNEXURE 4.4
Figure 1
3.
The different tests performed
during single car test of a coach:Test1:
Test2:
Test3:
Test4:
Test5:
Test6:
Test7:
Test8:
1.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
2.
Leakage Test.
Sensitivity and Insensitivity Test.
Brake Application and Release
Test.
Graduated
Application
and
Release Test.
Emergency Brake Application
Test.
Passenger Emergency Valve
Test.
Guards Emergency valve Test
Check and adjust Slack Adjuster.
vi)
Single Car Test Rig.
Spanners 10mm, 12mm
CONCEPT
vii)
Single Car Test is performed, by using a
portable device called Single Car Test
Rig. This test rig provides all facilities
like that of a drivers brake valve. The
source of compressed air for test rig is
through a compressor installed insick
lines for conducting various tests without
the need of a locomotive. A schematic
layout of Single Car Test Rig is shown
in figure 2.
Chapter 4,,Page 43 of 50
viii)
ix)
Figure 2
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
Open isolating
distributor valve.
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
cock
of
TESTS
4.1
Joints/connections to sub-assemblies.
It should be tested with soap water
for ascertaining leakage. Any leakage
found should be rectified.
the
Chapter 4,,Page 44 of 50
4.0
4.2
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
v)
ii)
Open cock
application.
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Chapter 4,,Page 45 of 50
4.6
(8)
for
emergency
4.7
ii)
iii)
iv)
vi)
x)
xi)
Observe the
precautions.
v)
vi)
necessary
safety
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Chapter 4,,Page 46 of 50
ii)
iii)
iv)
5.
b)
c)
7.
8.
9.
Piston stroke
Passenger alarm system
Pull the handle
Reset PEASD
Guards emergency valve test
a) Operate Guards valve handle
b)
c)
Chapter 4,,Page 47 of 50
Speci fied
0.2 kg/cm2/min (max.)
0.2 kg/cm2/min (max.)
3 to 5 seconds
3.8 +/-0.1 kg/cm2
15 to 20 seconds
Actual
ANNEXURE 4.5
RAKE TEST
The Air Brake system of the rake, that are
brought
at
primary/
secondary
maintenance depot, on every round trip
should be tested by using a Test Rig or
with a locomotive. The test rig is as
shown in figure 1.
The different activities/tests that are
performed on the air brake assemblies of
the rake are as follows:
A.
B.
C.
2.
Concept
Procedure
Check any
loose
suspension
brackets and anti-pilferage devices
of all air brake subassemblies
Visually inspect for any problem/
damage in the brake or feed pipe
hose pipe/coupling etc.
Rectify or replace the problematic
part/subassembly.
3.
50
1.
2.
Check
Leakage Rate
a) Brake pipe
b) Feed pipe
Service Application and Release
Test
a) Brake application when B.P.
pressure reduced to 1.5
Kg/cm2
b) Observe Piston stroke of
brake cylinder
c) Record the piston stroke
50
Specified
Actual
CHAPTER 5
501
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
501a
502
MAINTENANCE AT WORKSHOP
502a
502b
ii)
iii)
Train pipe
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
503
LIFTING SHOP
503a
Chapter 5, Page 1 of 14
HOSE PIPE
D.A. VALVE
RAIL LEVEL
D.A. VALVE
SLACK ADJUSTER
VACUUM RESERVOIR
TRAIN PIPE
Chapter 5, Page 2 of 14
SLACK ADJUSTER
503c
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii) Universal
coupling
should
be
examined for broken, cracked and
distorted lugs and renewed on
condition basis. Rubber solution
should be applied on the mating
Chapter 5, Page 3 of 14
503e
503f
Brake shaft
Brake shaft should be examined for
straightness, bending and wear on its
bearing surfaces. The shaft bearing worn
beyond 3 mm should be built up by welding
and machined to its original size. Before the
shaft is fitted into its brackets its bearing
surfaces should be smeared lightly with
grease. The fork arm should also be
examined for bending, distortion and wear
on its forked ends and restored to its original
shape and size as required. The brake shaft
mounted in its brackets under a coach
should be parallel to the trunnions on which
the cylinder swings to avoid setting up of
side or crosses stresses and hence damage to
the arm. The brake shaft should not have a
side play in its bracket bushes in excess of 2
mm after POH.
503g
503h
vi)
503i
v)
ii)
Chapter 5, Page 4 of 14
503j
iv)
504
OVERHAUL OF COMPONENTS
504a
Vacuum reservoir
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Chapter 5, Page 5 of 14
504b
ii)
504f
Table 5.1
Guide Bush
Inside diameter
44.52 +0/-0.03 mm
Outside diameter
54 +0/-0.1 mm
Renew all the rubber items like the neck
ring and gland box joint washer invariably.
Renew the worn/ loose guide bush. Replace
the worn, damaged, or broken studs. Secure
the gland box on the cylinder cover with
spring washers and nuts.
504g
504h
Piston
The cracked piston should be replaced. The
piston skirt serrations should be cleaned free
of dust, rust and sediments. Visually check
the piston for worn or cracks. Replace the
piston if found damaged beyond salvage.
Measure the out side diameter with
micrometer of range 575-600 mm & record
the dimensions. While assembling the
Piston and Vacuum cylinder the diametrical
difference between the two should be 20.3
mm. The blind holes for the piston rod
cover bolts should be tapped and eased.
Vacuum gauge
504e
Piston rod
Dismantle the piston rod from the piston.
Renew the bent, damaged, dented, worn,
corroded, or pitted piston rods. If the threads
of the piston rod are damaged, the rod
should be replaced.
Chapter 5, Page 6 of 14
504j
504k
ii)
Joint rings
Every time a vacuum cylinder is opened, the
joint ring should invariably be replaced.
After fitting the joint ring in the correct
position between flange of cylinder and
cover, it can be retained in the correct
alignment while fitting the cylinder cover to
the cylinder by suitably designed clips.
504m
Piston assembly
Rolling ring
i)
Chapter 5, Page 7 of 14
504n
Release valve
i)
Release
valve,
connected
through the cylinder port to
chamber of 1640 cu. cm.
volume with 510 mm of
vacuum
throughout
the
assembly, shall not, on
isolation from the source of
B)
Release
valve,
connected
through the chamber port to a
reservoir
with
vacuum
throughout the assembly shall,
when the vacuum is destroyed
in the train pipe by pulling on
the operating lever wire thus
operating the valve, remain in
the open position till there is
pull on the lever wire. It
should re-set immediately on
removal of the pull.
On re-creation of not more
than 205 mm of vacuum, the
valve shall re-set itself.
505
505a
Operation test:
505b
Chapter 5, Page 8 of 14
506
506a
Drawing Number
4A 38266
48174
KB 408
Dln 7603
Dln 7603
N 891 / 20.2
KB 115
506b
506d
ii)
Drawing Number
4KB 613
Diaphragm seat
4A 50314
Valve seat
4A 50807
Locking screw
4A 55757
Valve seat
4A 54952
Locking screw
4A 69805
Hex. nut
Spring washer
DIN 931
507
KB 137
Cup plate
KB 409
DIN 439
Washer
DIN 433
Compression spring
506c
4A 30485 / 8
Chapter 5, Page 9 of 14
507a
Length of end
piece
265 mm
155 mm
GAUGE B
(BRAKE CYLINDER)
GAUGE A
(TRAIN PIPE)
COCK - X
FILTER
1/2"
1/2
TO VACUUM
PUMP
TP
LC
RESERVOIR
34 LITER
1.2 Cu. ft.
COCK - Y
1/2"
DA VALVE
UNDER
TEST
3/4"
RESERVOIR
34 LITER
1.2 Cu. ft.
TESTING OF DA VALVE
Figure 5.2
508
509
ADJUSTMENT OF BRAKES
509a
509b
ii)
iii)
iv)
Chapter 5, Page 10 of 14
OF
510
ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTER
SLACK
510a
vi)
510b
Dimension `e'
i)
Chapter 5, Page 11 of 14
512
Sr.
No.
i)
Defects
Probable cause
h) Defective brake
rigging
Measure wheel
diameter and
check "e" dimension.
Chapter 5, Page 12 of 14
Remedies
ii)
Method of Testing
Sr.
No.
2)
Defects
Brake on a coach
do not release.
3)
Fall in vacuum on
run by 125 to 175
mm reported by
Driver.
4)
Vacuum cannot be
created on the train.
Probable cause
Method of Testing
On application &
release of brake see
whether the Slack
adjuster
barrel
rotates.
Move or shake by
hand and feet.
Test by a flame
which will be drawn
in at places of
leakage or close the
valve connecting the
source of vacuum,
after
creation
of
vacuum and check
the train needle in the
vacuum gauge which
will come down.
Visual examination
a) Drop of vacuum by
125 to 175 mm.
b) Drop of vacuum
by 125 to 175 mm.
a) Leakage at joints of
train pipe, train pipe
nipple, hose pipe,
Syphon pipe.
(b)Rubber washers
in hose pipe joints
missing or
twisted.
(c)Rearmost hose
pipe of the train
not secured
on its dummy.
(d)Leakage in vacuum
chamber.
(e)Guard' s van
valve leakage.
(f) D.A. Valve
leaking.
Chapter 5, Page 13 of 14
Remedies
Sr.
No.
5.
6)
Defects
Probable cause
Abnormal variation
in the amount of
vacuum
between
engine gauge and
brake van gauge.
a) Partial obstruction of
hose pipes of the train
pipe
Piston
applies
brakes when the
vacuum is created
Method of Testing
b) Vacuum gauge of
Guard Van valve
defective.
a) Leak at neck.
b) Wrong connection of
syphon pipe on the triple
way release valve
Ditto
*****
Chapter 5, Page 14 of 14
Remedies
CHAPTER 6
GENERAL
DESIGN FEATURES OF
SYSTEM (refer figure 6.1)
THE
603
603a
General
Low friction composite brake blocks
have the following benefits:
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Chapter 6, Page 1 of 14
n
n
603b
Composition of material
The
composition
of
material
constituting the brake blocks must be
chosen to give the best balance
between :
The braking characteristics
The wear and service life of blocks
Wear on the running surface of the
wheels
The effect on adhesion between the
rail and wheel
1 27
4-FIXING
HOLES %%C21
IN A STRAIGHT
STROKE
22
LINE)
117.5
127
% % p 0 .5
130
%%p0.5
95 MAX.
STROKE
(MUST BE
95 MAX.
C hapter 6, Page 2 of 14
+0
685 -10
679
%%p0.5
12 7
204
LEVERS MUST BE
THE CROSSHEAD IS
COACHES
IN ITIA L R E LE ASE
25
R EL EA SE PO SITION AF TE R
400
MOVEMENT TO BE ALLOWED FOR
365
31
M A X.
31
M AX.
47
MA X.
47
M A X.
204
% % p0 . 5
%%UNOTE:-
FIGURE 6.1
5
CD/8/2K
CD/4/2K
CD/21/99
CD/7/99
11/2K
DRAWING REVISED
ALT.
Chapter 6, Page 2 of 14
ITEM
CD/35/98
AUTHY.
SK-81200
ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS
4/2K
REFERENCE:-
SUPERSEDED BY:
P
C
12/99
NOTE 2 ADDED.
SUPERSEDES:
SCALE
2/99
SLACK ADJUSTER
J.S.
12/88
DATE
FLOPPY No. :-
B.G.
R . D . S . O.
(C)
GROUP
SKETCH-81057
RESETTING LATCH
iii.
603d
Mechanical
characteristics
and
603c
Chapter 6, Page 3 of 14
physical
Marking
Each block must bear the following
marks:-
Name of manufacturer
Date of manufacturer (month and
year)
Material code including KA for
asbestos type and KNA for nonasbestos type.
Type of service ML.
Parameters
Applicability
Speed
Coeffic
ient of
friction
Weight
Comparison of properties/Usage of
composition brake block Vs Cast Iron
Brake block
Type of Brake blocks in use on main line
coaches
'L' type CBB 'K' type
CI
CBB
All coaches All coaches All
with
with bogie coaches
underframe
mounted
with
mounted air brake
vacuum
brake system system
brake and
under
frame
mounted
brake
system
Upto
110 upto
110 Upto 140
KMPH
KMPH
KMPH
0.12 to 0.14
0.25 max.
0.12
to
0.14
Approx. 3
kg.
Approx. 3
kg
Approx. 9
kg.
604
WORKING PRINCIPLE
There is no change in the overall brake
system in bogie-mounted arrangement up
to the action of distributor valve. Here the
system will respond to action on A-9
valve in similar fashion as in the case of
standard air brake system. Working of
bogie mounted brake system beyond
distributor valve is explained below.
604a
604b
604c
605
2
1
3
C
8
7
10
b
5
Chapter 6, Page 4 of 14
COMPARISION
PARAMETERS
OF
IMPORTANT
INLET PLUG
compressed air is
supplied from loco
Slack up Action
Cylinders of bogie mounted brake system
are provided with automatic slack take up
features. As soon as the piston stroke
exceeds a pre determined value (on
account of either brake block or wheel or
both) a ratchet with adjusting screw fitted
inside the cylinder turns thereby
increasing the length of the piston rod
automatically. During return stroke, the
adjusting movement takes place. A red
paint mark on the adjusting tube assembly
indicates that piston unit has extended
over its full range and requires resetting of
pull rod (7).
Release
6.2
Table 6.1
Item
Weight reduction
(as compared to
conventional air
brake system)
Braking distance
at 110 kmph
(18 coaches)
No. of pins and
bushes
Brake block wear
rate
606
Conventional Air
Brake
System
-
Bogie
Mounted
Brake
System
492 kg.
905 m
800 m
102
84
3 cc/kwh
1.325
cc/kwh
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
As explained above, bogie mounted brake
system from maintenance point of view is
exactly same as the standard air brake
system except for brake cylinder, which
are different than the existing system.
Therefore, to maintain the system,
instructions contained in the Air Brake
System (chapter 4) will have to be
followed in addition to those which are
indicated in the maintenance manual for
brake
cylinders
supplied
by
manufacturers.
607
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS TO BE
TAKEN DURING MAINTENANCE
The
maintenance
of
underframe
equipments and fittings should be done as
per underframe mounted air brake system.
Following special precautions must be
taken to ensure proper working of the
bogie mounted brake system.
i)
Chapter 6, Page 5 of 14
ix)
x)
xi)
608f
Dismantling
i)
Unscrew
cross
head
and
adjusting tube sub-assembly.
ii)
iii)
iv)
608
DESCRIPTION AND
MAINTENANCE OF BOGIE
MOUNTED BRAKE CYLINDERS
(REFER RDSO SKETCH- 81200 &
81204)
608a
608b
608c
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
608d
Re-Setting
A red paint mark on the Adjusting tube
sub-assembly indicates that the piston unit
has extended over its full range and
requires re-setting. The design of brake
rigging unit is done in such a way that
range of slack adjuster covers the life of
brake blocks so that resetting and
replacing the brake blocks will be done at
the same time. While keeping the
adjusting screw stationary, by turning the
adjusting tube sub-assembly in clock wise
direction the distance between piston to
cross head is reduced to minimum level.
The resetting of unit takes place at
position.
608e
Chapter 6, Page 6 of 14
608g
9,10,11
Chapter 6, Page 7 of 14
A
2
12
14
13
15
18
16
32
19
20
28
21
24
23
17
22
25
29
19
30
26
18
31
52
50
51
61
47,48,49
34
%%p0.5
CRS
42
36,37,38
39
35
33
117.5
45,46
43,44
40,41,38
546 TO C OF CROSS
L HEAD EYE
FIGURE 6.3a
SUPERSEDED BY:
11/2000
Chapter 6, Page 7 of 14
TOLERANCES ADDED ON
DIMENSION 204 CRS %%P 0.5
CD/3/99
CD/35/98
TITEL CHANGED.
1,16
CD/24/98
VIEW CORRECTED.
ALT.
ITEM
AUTHY.
DESCRIPTION
ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS
REFERENCE:-
CHANGED TO 130%%P0.5mm
8/99
1:1
C
D
DATE
SK SRIVASTAVA
12/98
8/98
SUPERSEDES:
SCALE
J.S.
FLOPY No. :-
B.G.
GROUP
R . D . S . O.
3 4
(C)
1 2
SKETCH-81200
58,37,38
57
56,11
130
%%p0.5
60
27
55
59
54
%%uNOTE:-
53
+0.5
-0 204
CRS
%%USECTION A-A
FIGURE 6.3b
Chapter 6, Page 8 of 14
SUPERSEDED BY:
11/2000
CD/3/99
TOLERANCES ADDED ON
DIMENSION 204 CRS %%P 0.5
CD/35/98
TITEL CHANGED.
1,16
CD/24/98
VIEW CORRECTED.
ALT.
ITEM
AUTHY.
DESCRIPTION
ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS
REFERENCE:-
CHANGED TO 130%%P0.5mm
SUPERSEDES:
SCALE
C
1:1
8/99
DATE
SK SRIVASTAVA
12/98
8/98
J.S.
FLOPY No. :-
B.G.
GROUP
R . D . S . O.
3 4
(C)
1 2
SKETCH-81200
TABLE 6.2
Item
No. off
Ref. Drg.
Mtl. &
spec.
Remarks
Cylinder Body
SK-81201
Piston
SK-81203
Item - 1
Piston packing
SK-81204
Item -10
Plunger
SK-81206
Item - 2
Special Washer
SK-81206
Item-14
Plunger Spring
SK-81206
Item-18
Piston Trunk
SK-81204
Item-1 & 2
IS:3075
Galv.
Galv.
Alternatively M12x45
10
IS:1363
Galv.
11
IS:3063
Galv.
12
Dome cover
SK-81202
13
SK-81204
Item-9
14
Adjusting tube
SK-81204
Item-6, 7 & 8
15
Release Spring
SK-81206
Item-20
16
Guide bush
SK-81202
Item-2
17
SK-81205
18
Split pin 5 x 40
IS:549
Galv.
19
IS:2016
Galv.
20
IS:2388
Galv.
21
22
Dust excluder
SK-81204
Item-11
23
Latch
SK-81206
Item-3
24
Latch spring
SK-81206
Item-21
25
Ring
SK-81206
Item-23
26
As
required
SK-81206
Item-16
Item-1
Item-12
Galv.
Galv.
(20 mm high)
27
28
Special washer
SK-81206
Item-12
29
Trunion Body
SK-81205
Item-1
30
Coller
SK-81206
31
Item-4
IS:3075
Galv.
Chapter 6, Page 9 of 14
Item
No. off
Ref. Drg.
Mtl. &
spec.
Remarks
32
33
34
Plunger pin
SK-81206
Item-11
35
Rocker arm
SK-81206
Item-1
36
SK-81206
Item-10
37
Special washer
SK-81206
38
39
Roller
SK-81206
Item-5
40
SK-81206
Item-9
41
Washer
SK-81206
Item-5
42
Roller Plate
SK-81201
Item-2
43
Bush
SK-81202
Item-3
44
Filter
SK-81202
Item-4
45
Guide bar
SK-81204
Item-3
46
IS:2155
Galv.
47
IS:2155
Galv.
48
Hex. nut M6
IS:1363
Galv.
49
IS:3063
Galv.
50
Bush
SK-81206
51
Galv.
52
Cross head
SK-81203
Item-2
53
54
Special washer
SK-81206
Item-15
55
Pawl spring
SK-81206
Item-19
56
57
SK-81206
58
Pivot pin
SK-81205
Item-3
59
Pawl
SK-81206
Item-8
60
Plunger
SK-81206
Item-7
61
Retaining nut
SK-81206
Item-24
Chapter 6, Page 10 of 14
Galv.
IS:2393
Galv.
Item-9
IS:549
Galv.
Item-17
IS:3075
Galv.
Galv
Item-6
11 DRILL
%%C13 DRILL
+0
+0.5
-
-0.1
69.9
%%C21
%%C20
60%%d
+0.5
-0
1x45 %% D
%%c14
+0.1
-0.5
%%c82
1 08
98 .5
%%
L)
ORMA
+0
-0.1
.5
59R
%%C14
1x45 % %D
%%C13 DRILL
SECTION-`AA'
3R
+0
04
C1
%
=
20
c8 0(N
%%C47
3R
C8
%%
-0. 2
3R
10
3R
13 4
+0
.5
-
0.5
+
-
306
16
3R
+0
48 .5
1 02
% %c8 9 16 TP I (BSP)
+0.0
+0. 5
-
%% C89 .5-0.5
%% c95
%%C52
+0.2
-0. 5
+0.2
-
73
%%c80
25
Chapter 6, Page11of 14
63
+0.1
-
+0.1
-0
13R
19
3
+0
+0.5
-
120
333
52
=
73.1
-0.1
18
13
%%c168
3R
L
4
24
2.5
52
% %C1 8
25
10
74%%d
+0.05
%%C171.45 -0
%% C36 .5
% %C2 0
% %C4 0
50
%% C3 1 .5
+0.5
-0.0
+0.0
%%c35-0.02
4R
4R
1 0.2 5
+0. 0
18
IN POSITION.
-0.1
PISTON(SK-81203,ITEM-1)
+0.05
-0
16
THIS MACHINING TO BE
%%C186.5
3R
76
1X45%%D
DETAIL AT-`X'
(ENLARGED)
% %C45
16
%%c44.5-
3X45%%D
24
35
1.5
1.5x45%%D
46
130
391
64
4 -0.1
QUENCHING IN OIL)
05
%% C44
+0
-0. 01
%% C5
463
0.8
+0
%%c103
10
(ENLARGED)
OF THE COMPONENT.
4. ALTERNATIVELY PISTON FOLLOWER
THUS, &
+0.0
-
+0
-0.5
%% C36 .5 +0.1
-
+0.1
-
%% c7 /8" 9T PI
%% C8
15
DESCRIPTION
WITH HAND BRAKE
DIMENSION `L'
RDSO/SK-81200
6
ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS
REFERENCE:-
19
3"
DIA 2 START;1 1/4" LEAD,
8
4.5
2
4 Nos-%%C12 HOLES
EQUISPACED FOR
PLUG WELDING
FIGURE 6.4
CD/8/2000
CD/35/98
%%c171.45
%%C186.5
%%c191
%%c203.2
Chapter 6, Page 11 of 14
ALT.
10
ITEM
CD/24/98
AUTHY.
ADJUSTING TUBE
DUST EXCLUDER
GUIDE BAR
PISTON TRUNK
ITEM
50
%%c168
%%C5
102
%%c172
IS:2062-92
Fe-410WA
RESETTING PLATE
ST.GR.CDS-6 OR
CDS-13,
BS-980-1955
TO BE PAINTED RED.
%%c208
IS:2062-92
Fe-410WA
86 SQ.
430
13
EN 353
62
21
501
ANNEXURE-'A'
of Spec.C-K013
%% C2 5
SECTION-`BB'
PISTON PACKING
TITLE CHANGED
1. MATERIAL SPEC. CHANGED
2. DIMENSION 182 CHANGED TO
186.5, TOLERANCE CORRECTED
DESCRIPTION
PISTON FOLLOWER
SCALE
8/98
FLOPY No. :-
B.G.
REF. DRG.
&
MTL. SPEC.
P
C
D
WT. OF
ONE kg.
SK.SRIVASTAVA
T
J.S.
DATE
IS:2062-92
Fe-410WA
OFF
SUPERSEDES:
2:1
12/98
STEEL
IS:1239-90 PART-1
No.
SUPERSEDED BY:
1:1
11/2000
IS:2155
R . D . S . O.
(C)
GROUP
GALV.
IS:2062-92
Fe-410WA
SKETCH-81204
HEAVY
SEE NOTE
No.4
REMARKS
%% C30
492
X.
34
+0
-0.02
R
3.2
% %C19. 05 - 0.13
1R
1.6
49.2
% % C25. 31 -0. 05
+0.0
-0.
3R
4. 5 +0
3 %% d
0.4R
%%
C4
.
. .
.
3
" , 2 START, 1/4" LEAD, 1/8" PITCH,
%%C1
8
10
9.5
BE HEAT TREATED.
18 TEETH EQUI-SPACED
+0
16R
18
13
+0.1
1X45%%D
608h
Assembly
After cleaning and inspection of all the
parts and before re-assembly apply
uniform layer of grease Esso Becon 2 on
all the moving parts. Grease cylinder body
and piston packing liberally with Esso
Becon 2.
i)
ii)
iii)
Insert
pawl
(ensure
proper
position) pawl spring in the square
hole of the trunion body and lock it
with strip. Bend the ends of the
strip.
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
Chapter 6, Page 12 of 14
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
Place hand brake trunion subassembly on piston trunk subassembly. Screw collar on piston
trunk sub-assembly and screw in
grub screw. Put latch spring and
latch in cross head. Insert ring in
the latch.
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
608i
Testing Procedure
A.
Full Stroke
B. Take-up Stroke
SCALE 0.5 MM
3
UNION
BED PLATE
SCREW DOWN
COCK-2
AIR SUPPLY
1
Chapter 6, Page 13 of 14
MAIN RESERVOIR
C.
iv)
v)
608j
ii)
Chapter 6, Page 14 of 14
608k
Special Tools
Table 6.3
Description
No. off
Double
end
spanner
tighten/loosen M6 nut
to
5 mm Allen key
*****
CHAPTER 7
701
INTRODUCTION
Depending upon the train lighting
systems, the coaches are of following
types.
2.
3.
BG COACHES
Self Generating
(SG) Coaches
End On Generation
(EOG) AC Coaches
Split type
Under
slung
Roof Mounted
Package Unit
(RMPU)
Split type
Under Slung
Chapter 7, Page 1 of 21
AC
Coaches
Mid On Generation
(MOG) Coaches
Non- AC
Coaches
RMPU with 25
KVA inv erter
702
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
MAJOR EQUIPMENT
702a
OF
Ratings
ii.
18kW/
22.75kW/
25kW
alternators are fitted with 12 Nos. of
deep V-grooved pulleys of 200 mm
PCD with six grooves on each side of
the shaft, which is driven by V-belt in
conjunction with an axle pulley.
ELPS/SPEC/TL/01,
Dec. 1993
Optimized 22.75
kW/25kW,
used on non AC
coaches.
EL/TL/54 Rev 'A'
702b
RECTIFIER-CUM-REGULATOR
UNIT (RRU)
The rectifier cum regulator unit has
mainly following functions:
ii
BATTERIES
The following types of batteries are
provided on under -frame of AC & non
AC Self Generating type and End On
Generation type coaches.
i.
battery box is
corrosive paint.
702f
Chapter 7, Page 3 of 21
702g
BATTERY BOX
ICF type design battery box
for AC coaches is a fabricated
framework made of mild steel
confirming to drg. No. WGFAC-7-1026. Whereas RCF design is of closed
type confirming to drg. No. CC71448
(PP side) & CC71451 (NPP side), It is
suspended on coach in the under
frame and is provided with front
opening doors for paying attention to
batteries. FRP trays are provided to
prevent corrosion. The interior of the
702h
TL Lamps
25 and 40 Watt lamps are
provided in the non AC coaches. The
power supply is at 110 Volt DC. 25
Watt lamps are used in corridor, light
lamp, wash-basin, toilet. 40 W lamps
are used for lights in the coach.
702i
702j
Carriage Fans
On non AC BG coaches 400
mm sweep carriage fans are used where
system voltage is 110 DC. These fans
are fixed type and confirm to IS : 668092 with latest annexure 'H' for deviation
to IS 6680-92.
703
TRIP SCHEDULE
(PRIMARY & SECONDARY
MAINTENANCE)
703a
ATTENTION ON MAINTENANCE
LINES
As soon as the rake is berthed
in the maintenance lines and before
commencing the work, a caution board
shall be clamped to the rail on either
side of the rake by TXR or his
representative. Rail locks shall be used
on either side of the rake for the safety
of maintenance staff attending under
gear equipment. TXR should ensure
clearance
from
electrical
Chargemen/staff incharge for the
maintenance of rack before removing
the caution board and rail locks.
To avoid any malfunctioning
of the above system, print ed forms for
permit to work on pit lines issued by
the traffic department and after
completion of the work, completed /
men withdrawn form can be used.
Check
the
plate-form
attention report and concentrate first on
attending the defects in these coaches
by adapting systematic trouble shooting
procedures. Proceed as follows in
respect of other equipment.
703b
ALTERNATOR
First attend alternators in
coaches for generation, which have
arrived "cold" and coach dark condition
Chapter 7, Page 4 of 21
703e
Check
the
cable
for
any
abnormality from the alternator to
the regulator by using test lamp, if
found open/short attend the same.
BELTS
AXLE PULLEY
n
703d
703c
Chapter 7, Page 5 of 21
703f
BATTERIES/BATTERY BOX
i.
Conventional
Batteries
Lead
Acid
2
11
3
12
4
13
5
14
6
15
7
16
8
17
9
18
Table 7.2
Month
1st Month
2nd Month
3rd Month
4th Month
5th Month
6th Month
Pilot Cells
1, 12, 13
2, 11, 14
3, 10, 15
4, 9, 16
5, 8, 17
6, 7, 18
Ensure the
cleaned.
cells
are
properly
703h
FANS
Following scheme is prescribed for all
trains during primary or secondary
maintenance at a depot:n
EARTH CHECKING
Before checking the earth in
the coach, it should ensure that coach is
not connected to the adjacent coach
through
EFT
(Emergency
Feed
Terminal). After isolating the coach the
earth shall be tested by using a double
test lamp as explained in the RDSO
code of practice of 110 V coaches. If
any earth is noticed the required
corrective measures should be taken to
remove the earth before inducting the
coach in the service. No coach shall be
allowed for service with +ve earth.
However incase of ve earth this can be
allowed for maximum one trip that too
with properly marking as ve earthed.
Record all the attention given
in the under frame and roof, the
Specific Gravity, the condition of
generation, lamps, fans and fuses,
availability of belts etc. with coach and
other details.
Chapter 7, Page 7 of 21
Remove
carbon
brushes.
Check brushes for condemning
size, proper bedding, correct
spring tension and correct
grade of brush.
Check for free movement of
brush in the brush holder.
Replace defective brushes/
springs.
If the commutator is dirty,
clean the surface with sand
paper of 0/0 size.
Chapter 7, Page 8 of 21
LIGHTING
n
Replace
broken
glass
domes/acrylic covers of tubelights.
Use
fuses/fuse
wires
of
recommended sizes in junction
box as a stop gap measure in place
of MCBs and HRC fuses. Ensure
that fuse wire provided in junction
box as a temporary measures
enroute should be rep laced with
MCBs & HRC fuses of the correct
sizes at the primary maintenance
depot.
Chapter 7, Page 9 of 21
704
FORTNIGHTLY SCHEDULE
704a
BATTERY
VRLA
Batteries
:
SMI.No.
RDSO/PE/TL/SMI/0001-98 IRev
0) dtd. 01.06.98 to be followed.
Chapter 7, Page 10 of 21
705
MONTHLY SCHEDULE
In addition to the works mentioned in
Trip & Fortnightly Examination, carry
out the following:
705a
case
pilot
cells
show
no
appreciable improvement, check
specific gravity of adjacent cells. If
the specific gravity does not
improve in spite of charging,
replace the battery by another set
and send the defective battery to
Depot/Shop for treatment at the
earliest. Cells should be handled
with due care while unloading and
in transit to avoid breakage.
Adequate facilities should be
created in Depot for treatment of
cells which do not pick up charge.
Sulphation will be the main cause
for this and Sulphated
cells
should be treated for their recovery
as specified.
705b
705c
AXLE PULLEY
n
BATTERIES
i.
Record
specific
gravity
of
individual
cells/mono
block.
"Switch on" full load of the coach
and record individual voltage of
cells and total
voltage. "Switch
off" load. If the specific gravity is
less than that
painted on the
battery box, charge the cells as
specified
under
"Trip
Examination" after topping up with
DM water, if required.
Use battery charging terminals
provided on coaches for charging
purposes.
Charging should be
continued till the specific gravity
rises to the value of mentioned in
battery box, on "Pilot" cells. In
Chapter 7, Page 11 of 21
ii.
VRLA Batteries
SMI no. IRCAMTECH/PE /TL/ SMI/
0001-98- (Rev.0) dtd. 01.06.98 &
RDSO/PE/TL/SMI/ 0002-98 (Rev.0) dt.
09.12.98
705d
JUNCTION BOX
n
FANS
705g
CARRIAGE LIGHTING
In addition to the items listed out under
"Trip Examination" proceed as follows.
n
Chapter 7, Page 12 of 21
705h
Mark
inspection
covers
of
Distribution fuse boards as `DFB'
if not done already.
705i
DISTRIBUTION FUSE
AND FUSE CUT OUTS
BOARDS
ii. VRLA Batteries :
SMI no.RDSO/PE/TL/SMI-000198
(Rev.0)
dt.01.06.98
&
RDSO/PE/TL/SMI/0002-98
(Rev.0) dt. 09.12.98 to be
followed.
707
705j
707a
SUPER STRUCTURE
Short all the outgoing positive
terminals from MCB cum fuse panel.
706
QUARTERLY SCHEDULES
706a
BATTERIES
Between
the
main
negative
outgoing terminals and earth.
Conventional
Batteries
Chapter 7, Page 13 of 21
Lead
Acid
707b
UNDERFRAME
Short the incoming terminals PM and
L+ in MCB cum fuse panel. Measure
and record the following insulation
values:
Use
corrosion
inhibiting
conducting grease while crimping
cables or while connecting wires
to prevent oxidation.
Chapter 7, Page 14 of 21
Fans
Reading light fittings
Side light fittings
Tail light fittings
Step light fittings.
708
POH SCHEDULE
708a
BRUSHLESS
ALTERNATOR
stator
OVERHAULING
n
The
machine
received
for
overhauling should be externally
cleaned with wire brush and wiped
before dismantling.
After
complete
fitment
and
greasing, the bearing noise shall be
recorded using shock pulse meter.
ii.
ELECTRICAL CHECKS
n
n
Chapter 7, Page 15 of 21
iv.
TESTING OF ALTERNATORS
Place of Check
Between stator.
winding and earth
Above 1 M
Between field
winding and earth.
Above 1 M
Between field
winding and stator.
Above 1 M
Alternator
Regulator
Place of Check
Required Value
Conventional Coaches
v.
NO LOAD TEST
b) Alternator terminal
- Should
not exceed 100 0 C
at ambient of 500 C.
LOAD TEST
Connect the alternator
and
regulator
with
resistance/battery load. Run
the alternator at half load i.e.
19 Amp. and full load 37.5
Amp. respectively at various
Chapter 7, Page 16 of 21
708b
- Should not
exceed 900 C at
win ding load of
37.5 Amps.
708c
708d
Replace
the
damaged
wiring/terminals. The wiring of the
regulator
shall
be
done
systematically,
Battery
boxes
shall
be
cleaned/repaired and repainted with
anti corrosive epoxy based paint
after removing the bat tery. Check
the opening of welds and cracks
thoroughly specially on load
bearing members, vicinity of
mounting bolts etc. Detection of
minor hair line crack shall be done
with ultrasonic testers.
If there is corrosion/sulphation on
the inter-cell- connectors etc., clean
them thoroughly and protect from
further corrosion by applying
petroleum jelly or Vaseline. Cell
connectors and fasteners should be
changed on condition basis.
708e
Chapter 7, Page 17 of 21
ii.
Remove
isolation
hit and
cir cuiting
of earth.
Coach insulation
Insulation resistance of the coach
shall be measured with 500 V
megger. IR value should be
minimum 2 Mega ohms but it
should not be less than 1 Mega
ohm under highly humid/wet
weather.
Chapter 7, Page 18 of 21
earth fault by
method instead of
trials and short
of opposite polarity
708g
SWITCHES,
ETC.
LIGHT
708h
FANS
n
Check
the
guard
assembly,
repair/replace if necessary.
Check
the
commutator
for
grooving, pitting marks, ovality,
blackness
etc.
Polish
the
commutator if required.
FITTINGS,
i. Light fittings
The light fittings, reflectors, clear
acrylic sheet cover, glass globe,
holders, etc., shall be checked and
cleaned. Any defective part shall be
replaced. Ant i- theft arrangement
for fluorescent light fittings shall be
checked as per ICF Drg. No.
ICF/SK-7-6-079.
ii.
Chapter 7, Page 19 of 21
i)
ii)
NOTE :
709
709a
SKF/FAG
(imported)
make
bearings for alternator procured
directly from manufacturers as
specified
in
the
RDSO
specification shall be used. Use of
other makes of bearing is not
permitted.
Shock pulse meter shall be
procured
by
Railways
and
workshops to monitor condition of
the bearing regularly during
maintenance service and after
replacement of defective bearings.
ii.
DONTS
n
Dont
over-grease
bearing.
ALTERNATOR
i.
DOS
n
Chapter 7, Page 20 of 21
709b
the
REGULATOR
i.
DOS
n
Do check the
regulator
terminal box once in a
month for loose connections
and for cleaning the dust.
ii.
DONTS
n
709c
ii.
DONTS
n
`V BELTS
i.
DOS
n
Chapter 7, Page 21 of 21
709d
CHAPTER 8
INTRODUCTION
End On Generation
coaches
Roof Mounted
Package Unit
Under Slung
801a
Self Generating
coaches
Under Slung
801b
b.
(ii)
b.
110 V
DC
with Roof
Mounted AC Package Units
working from 415 V, 3 ,
obtained with the help of 25
KVA inverters mounted on
underslung as well as
onboard.
Chapter 8 Page 1 of 28
3.
Expansion Valve
4.
5.
Roof Mounted
Package Unit
6.
7.
802
802a
iii.
Alternators
n
Axle Pulley
n
ii
Examine
the
indicating
white mark on the pulley
axle and ensure that the
pulley has not shifted . If
pulley has shifted , pulley to
be removed
and retightened after replacing
rubber
pads.
Indicating
white marks to be provided.
Also check distance between
wheel axle and axle pulley
with gauge.
Tap wit h hammer and
judge the tightness by
sound.
Check profile of V
groove for worn out
pulleys, replace pulley if
worn out.
Belts
n
Chapter 8 Page 2 of 28
iv.
Check
the
level
of
electrolyte in all the cells
and top up with distilled
water, if necessary.
In case of sulphation of
terminals
remove
the
connectors, clean, put back
and apply petroleum jelly.
Check suspension/cradle of
battery box for availability
of all suspension bolts, signs
of any crack, corrosion,
rusting and take corrective
action, if necessary.
Chapter 8 Page 3 of 28
v.
Check
suspension
of
compressor motor unit for
any signs of crack, corrosion
and rusting. Take remedial
action if required.
Examine
flexible
type
coupling and replace, if
found defective.
Clean
the
compressor
externally with compressed
air.
Examine
the
fixing
arrangement,
check
the
condition of the anti
vibration mountings for
tightness of the fixing bolt.
viii. Condenser
n
vii. Compressor
ix.
n
Check
the
proper
lubrication of compressor
level of oil when operating
should be upto half of the
bull eye glass.
Chapter 8 Page 4 of 28
xiii.
x
xi
Thermostats
n
xii.
Filters
xiv.
xv.
Check
for
any
loose
connection & tighten if
necessary.
Pre-Cooling Unit
n
Clean
rectifier
externally
with
compressed air.
Panel Board
n
Chapter 8 Page 5 of 28
unit
dry
General
n
802b
MONTHLY SCHEDULE
In addition to the trip schedule
items, following are also to be attended.
i.
Axle Pulley
n
iv.
v.
Alternators
n
ii.
Belts
n
Chapter 8 Page 6 of 28
vi.
Battery
Conventional
Batteries
n
Lead
Acid
Remove
inter-cell
connection, take out the
cells, clean thoroughly
the cells, intercell and end
cell connectors and fit
back in the coach. Use
petroleum jelly.
viii.
Examine condition of
battery boxes. Paint if
necessary.
VRLA Batteries
SMI no.RDSO /PE/ TL /SMI /0001-98
(Rev.0)
dt.
01.06.98
and
RDSO/PE/TL/SMI/0002-98 (Rev.0)
dt. 09.12.98 to be followed.
vii.
Compressor Motor
n
ix.
Check
the
terminal
connections in the terminal
box
and
tighten,
if
necessary.
Examine the incoming leads
for proper connections and
tightness. Check the flexible
conduit for proper anchoring
at both ends.
Measure the spring tension
of brush holder. If less than
the value recommended by
manufacturer, replace the
spring.
Chapter 8 Page 7 of 28
x.
Evaporator Motor
n
Compressor
n
xi.
xii.
802c
Axle Pulley
n
ii.
Panel Board
n
n
n
iii.
in the
Alternator
n
iv.
xiii.
QUARTERLY SCHEDULE
Chapter 8 Page 8 of 28
Condenser
n
v.
Dehydrator
Receiver
n
vi.
803a
Expansion
v.
vi.
General
n
803
And
with
pre-cleaned/new-filter
and
close
access
doors
properly.
Check the log sheet maintained
for each AC coach and attend
the defects noticed during run
as reported by escorting staff.
Liquid
Evaporator
Valve
vii.
and
MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULE
FOR ROOF MOUNTED AC
PACKAGE UNITS AND ITS
CONTROL PANEL
TRIP SCHEDULE (PRIMARY
AND
SECONDARY
MAINTENANCE)
i.
iii.
iv.
Chapter 8 Page 9 of 28
Put
RSW-2 in ``ON
position and keep RSW-3
in `VENT position and
check that:
q Indication LED (green
ii.
803b
MONTHLY SCHEDULE
In addition to trip schedule following
items should also to be attended to:i. Run the plant for half an hour and
check the current drawn by various
equipment with the help of clamp
tester.
ii.
Chapter 8 Page 10 of 28
Compressor motors
: 7-10 Amp.
Condenser motors
: 1.5-2 Amp.
Blower Motor
: 1.5-2.5 Amp.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
CONTROL PCB
Keep the AC package unit in
Auto Mode. Run the blower short
terminals of cooling thermostat
on PCB. The compressor LED
indication should come ON.
Open the terminals of heating
thermostat on PCB Heater LED
should come `ON.
ix.
x.
xi.
Terminal Connections/Fixing :
xii. Inverter
Caution: Inverter must be switched off
preferably at power panel itself before
attempting to do any maintenance
operation.
inaccessible parts.
803c
Capacitor - On observing
leakage of any capacitor
inside the inverter remove
the respective capacitor
and replace with new one
of the same value and
make.
QUARTERLY SCHEDULE
In addition to trip and monthly schedules
following items should also be attended.
i.
Inverter
Caution: inverter must be switched
off preferably at power panel itself
before attempting to do any
maintenance operation.
n
Cleaning of cubicle :
Dust
deposit inside the converter
should be carefully removed at
regular basis. Unit should be
cleaned with brush and vacuum
cleaner or with dry compressor
(Max. 1 bar) inaccessible parts.
Cleaning of PCBs : Using a soft
brush, remove the dust collected
on PCBs gently.
Chapter 8 Page 11 of 28
ii.
Drip Tray
iii.
Chapter 8 Page 12 of 28
NOTE :
n
SKF/FAG
(imported)
make
bearings for alternator procured
directly from manufacturers as
specified in the RDSO specification
shall be used. Use of other makes
of bearing is not permitted.
804
804a
V-belts:
Others
805a.
iii. Dusting
With the help of compressed air
remove the dust of air ducts.
iv.
Lifting
Remove the alternator cables and
carry out visual inspection on conduit
and refrigeration pipes. Remove the
alternators from bogies. Replace
alternator, regulator and tensioning
gears with over hauled alternator,
regulator and tensioning gear. During
this activity carry out repairs, if
required, to equipment suspension
arrangement on under carriage. Send
the alternators and regulators to shop
for overhauling.
ii. Stripping
v.
Simulation testing
Check the alternator output on
different load conditions. Check
both the alternators for load sharing
with the help of variable speed
motors.
vi. Equipping
Condenser
including
liquid
receiver cum dehydrator and
condenser motors
Battery charger-cum-pre-cooling
transformer
Thermostats
Control p anel
Expansion valve
Carriage fans
Ammeters and
power panel
Chapter 8 Page 13 of 28
voltmeters
Alternator
Tensioning
Connection
and
of
805b
OVERHAULING ACTIVITIES OF
MAJOR AC EQUIPMENTS DURING
POH
i.
In case of carrier 5F 30
compressor match the colour
to ensure proper matching
between tapered shaft and
corresponding
flexible
coupling.
In
case
of
ACCEL
compressor check the end
play of crank shaft and
replace the thrust plate, if
necessary.
Compressors
The given activities are only for
under slung type AC system
installed with open type
compressors. Remove driving
flange and provide `V' groove
pulley. Test the compressor to
ascertain its condition. Record
the oil pressure during run. For
Carrier
and
ACCEL
compressors,
oil
pressure
developed should be 3.2 to 3.9
Kg/Sq. cm and 4.2 to 4.9
Kg/Sq.cm respectively.
n Dismantle
the
completely.
compressor
Inspect
and
check
the
dimensions of the wearing
components. Replace the worn
out components.
Piston rings
Scrapper ring
Suction
valve
Shaft
rings
Gasket packing
and
seal
discharge
assembly/O
Chapter 8 Page 14 of 28
ii.
tests
on
should
be
overhauled
Vacuum test
Vacuum test
The compressor shall be run with suction
valve closed and delivery valve open to
atmosphere till a vacuum of 100 mm of
Hg. below atmospheric pressure is
created. The drop in vacuum level shall be
recorded, after switching off the
compressor.
Sub-merge test
The compressor shall be charged with dry
air at 21 Kg/sq.cm pressure and
submerged in water. Then check shall be
conducted for any leakage; the same shall
be attended and test repeated. No leakage
through casing shall be permitted.
iii. Condenser Unit (Including
receiver cum dehydrator)
n
liquid
Dismantle
the
MS
Frame,
condenser coil, liquid receivercum-dehydrator. Cover the inlet
and outlet flanges of cooling coil
with a strip of cover plate and
gasket so that water may not enter
in to cooling coil. Clean thoroughly
the condenser coil, MS frame by
dry air to remove the loose
suspended particles in and around
cooling fins.
Chapter 8 Page 15 of 28
v.
Motors
for
Condenser,
Compressor & Evaporator
n
If armature is in good
condition apply a coat of air
drying varnish
on the
winding.
Check
the
commutator
surface. If the surface is found
improper,
skim
the
commutator surface.
Chapter 8 Page 16 of 28
After
the
compressor/
condenser
motor
is
completely
assembled
connect a milli-voltmeter
across brushes of opposite
polarity. Connect the shunt
field to 110V mains through a
switch. Switch on the mains
and note the kick in the
voltmeter. Rock the brush
gear to the left or right and
repeat the test as before.
Clamp the rocker arm in a
particular position at which
the kick is zero or minimum.
Before this test, care should
be taken to make sure that the
brushes are bedded properly.
If brushes are at neutral axis,
the speed in both the
directions of rotation will be
same.
After the evaporator is
completely assembled the
neutral axis can be selected
by running the motor in both
the directions on no load at
approximately 25% of the
rated voltage and measure the
speed in both the directions.
If brushes are at neutral axis,
the speed in both the
directions of rotation will be
same.
Chapter 8 Page 17 of 28
vi.
Control Panel
n
Similarly,
dismantle
the
contacts of the relays and
clean them by means of clean
rag socked in petrol. Any
contacts which are
burnt
should be replaced.
Measure
the
insulation
resistance of each relay and
contactor. If the insulation
value is less then 2 mega
ohms, replace the coil of the
respective unit.
Check
whether
all
connections are tight. If found
loose, tighten the same.
viii.
Refrigerator Piping
n
ix.
Pre-Cooling Transformer
Rectifier Unit
n
Check
all
protective
circuit and fuses etc.
Chapter 8 Page 18 of 28
Fans
n
Check
the
insulation
resistance of the fan motor.
The IR value should not be
less than 2 mega ohms as
specified in IS: 6680-1992.
&
x.
Testing
q
xi.
n
Light fittings
xii.
Air Filter
n
Coach insulation
Insulation resistance of the coach
shall be measured with 500 V
megger. IR value will be
minimum 2 mega ohms but it
should not be less than 1 mega
ohm under highly humid/wet
weather.
Wiring
Chapter 8 Page 19 of 28
n
n
n
n
xiv.
n
n
n
n
n
Check
the
proper
functioning of WRA.
n
xv.
Chapter 8 Page 20 of 28
n
n
ii.
806
806a
POH
SCHEDULE
FOR
SELF
GENERATING (SG) TYPE AC
COACHES FITTED WITH ROOF
MOUNTED AC PACKAGE UNIT
(Ref. : RDSO maintenance schedule No.
ELPS/SCH/AC/01 )
SEQUENCE OF WORK
TACKLED DURING POH
i.
TO
Lifting
Remove the alternator cable and
carry out visual inspection on
conduit. Remove the alternator
from bogies, replace alternator,
regulator and tensioning gear with
overhauled alternator, regulator and
tensioning
gear.
Suspension
arrangement on under carriage
frame.
Send
the
alternators
regulators to shop for overhauling.
Lift the roof-mounted unit with the
help of 1 ton lifting arrangement as
per procedure given below and
place it on the wheeled trolley to
take it to the shop for overhauling.
iii.
Disconnect
condensed
drainpipe connection.
BE
Pre-Inspection
On arrival to shop, place the coach
on the pit line and inspect the
electrical
and
air-conditioning
equipment. Conduct the cooling
test. If the cooling time is less than
the specified values, any further
attention to refrigeration circuit is
not necessary, except cleaning.
Check operation of all protections
and note down the defects and
deficiencies. In case of selfgenerating type of coaches,
disconnect the cable connection
from alternator terminals and
remove belt tensioning device.
Chapter 8 Page 21 of 28
iv.
Stripping
ii.
v.
Battery charger
Inverter units
Carriage fans
Dusting
iv.
Equipping
In this activity fit all the
refrigeration
and
electrical
equipment
to
its
respective
positions. Connect all the wiring
and flanges in the refrigeration
system wherever necessary.
806b
vii.
Chapter 8 Page 22 of 28
806d
OVERHAULING ACTIVITIES
MAJOR AC EQUIPMENTS
i.
Compressor
There is no need to open the
refrigeration system of the ac
package units, since it is
completely sealed at factory.
Conduct the cooling test. If the
time required to cool the coach is
more than the recommended value
and it does not decrease even after
cleaning
of
condenser
and
evaporator, the compressor will
have to be changed.
ii.
i. Static Testing
Run the plant through precooling terminals and check
for proper functioning of
electrical
and
air
conditioning
equipment,
including all the protections.
ii. Simulating Testing
For self-generating type of
coaches,
check
the
alternator
and
inverter
output on different load
conditions. Check both the
alternators for load sharing.
iii. Alternator
Connection
and Tensioning
In this activity join the
connection of alternator and
fit
the
belt -tensioning
device. Provide 6+6 V
belts for alternator.
Chapter 8 Page 23 of 28
OF
iii.
Create a vacuum of 50
micron for 15 minutes with
the help of two stage rotary
vacuum pump to extract the
moisture
from
the
refrigeration system.
Charge the
required
quantity of refrigerant gas
(R22)
as
per
recommendation
of
the
manufacturer.
Charging
stub-tube on the compressor
should be 1/4" OD and of
heavy gauge. Pinch off
charging tube nearest to the
compressor body so that it
remains as short as possible.
Longer stub tube can break
due to vibrations. Place
slight amount of solder at the
pinch
point
for
strengthening.
iv.
Motor for
Evaporator
n
n
n
n
Condenser
and
Chapter 8 Page 24 of 28
v.
Similarly,
dismantle
the
contacts of the relays and clean
them by means of clean rag
soaked in petrol. Contacts
which are burnt should be
replaced.
Check
for
cracks/edging,
deterioration of wiring. HV test
shall be performed with 2.5 KV
for 1 minute. IR shall be min. 10
M ohm.
n
Check that all mounting screws
are intact and tight.
n
Check all terminals, terminal
marking and ensure that legend
plates are intact.
n
Check all indicating LEDs are
functioning.
vi. Cut Outs
Measure
the
insulation
resistance of each relay and
contactor. If the insulation
value is less than 2 mega ohms,
replace
the
coil
having
Insulation Resistance less than
2 mega ohm, also check the
following:
vii.
Calibrate
gauges.
Check
for
operation
of
heating/cooling relay and PCB
for
ensuring
automatic
functioning of AC units.
Chapter 8 Page 25 of 28
the
standard
with
viii.
Clean
the
semi-conductor
device's
heat
sink
with
compressed air. In case the dust
is not removed completely from
fins use hard hairbrush and again
blow with compressed air for
cleaning the heat sink.
ix.
n
n
n
n
x.
Testing
Chapter 8 Page 26 of 28
xi.
Light Fittings
Coach Insulation
Cable Joints
It shall be checked. Loose
joints and cables having
damaged insulation shall be
replaced/repaired. All cable
ends shall be properly
socketed with crimping type
copper sockets.
Surface of copper sockets and
bus bars shall be cleaned to
remove the oxide film from
the jointing surface before
making a bolted joint and
shall be coated with corrosion
resistant conducting grease of
approved make to prevent
reformation of oxide film.
in
xii.
xiii.
Testing
n
Chapter 8 Page 27 of 28
Cooling test
Cooling test should be carried out
by
providing
electrical
compensating heat loads for
worst ambient conditions and full
occupancy of the coach. After the
stabilization, the temperature of
each berth (20 mm from window
and back rest panel and 100 mm
above the berth) should be
recorded. The variation in
temperature on different berths
should not exceed 1 0 C.
xiv.
Tighten
needed.
as
Measure
insulation
resistance value of the
circuit with 500 V megger. It
should not be less than 2
mega ohms.
Check
doors.
Run
the
plants
with
dynodrive motor for 8 hrs. at
different speeds.
Check
the
proper
functioning of WRA.
Ensure
that
both
the
alternators are sharing load
equally during run. If not set
both the alternator panels.
xv.
connections
Suction pipe
lagging.
Check hooter
operation.
Chapter 8 Page 28 of 28
for
for
proper
proper
xvi.
leakage
air
from
Final Inspection
n
*****
CHAPTER 9
901
901a
Description
General
Arrangement
Draw Hook
Draft Yoke
Draft Key
Draw bar and
castle nut
Rubber buffer
spring
Screw
coupling assly.
Details
of
screw
coupling
ii)
VSM10661
Stc.60 -61
SK-79061
IS:5517-93
Gr.35Mn6M03
SK-99003
SK-79062
SK-79146
SK-79064
SK-79063
SK-99004
SK-99005
SK-99006
SK-99007
SK-99001
SK-79068
SK-99002
Guidelines
Chapter 9, Page 1 of 8
i)
Pre -inspection
Dismantling
Chapter 9, Page 2 of 8
of
Wear
limit
Suggested
no go gauge
Root of hook
near point of
contract with
bent link
13 mm
Profile
gauge with
15
mm
adjustable
projection
62 mm dia pin
hole
3 mm
65 mm flat
Bottom side of
shank 56 mm
height
15 mm
41 mm snap
Draft
key
slot(159 mm)
13 mm
173 mm flat
38 mm width
2 mm
40 mm flat
Hook opening
48 mm
5 mm
46 mm go
53 mm no
go plug
Table 9.3
Wear
limit
Suggested no
go gauge
9 mm
164 mm snap
39 mm
body
shank
3 mm
36 mm snap
Slot width 38 mm
2 mm
40 mm flat
Threads M39x3
1 mm
Thread profile
Location of wear
alt.3
&
Draft Yoke
(Ref. Drawing : RDSO Sk.79146 alt.2 &
Sk.99005)
Draft Key
(Ref. Drawing : RDSO SK. 79064 alt.2 &
Sk.99006)
Component
Wear
location
Wear
limit
Suggested
no go
gauges
Draft
yoke
45 mm dia
hole
3mm
48 mm flat
Bush
32mm dia
hole
1mm
33 mm flat
Table 9.4
Location of
wear
Wear
limit
Suggested no go
gauge
Draw bar
seating 139
mm
4 mm
Draw hook
seating 139
mm
4 mm
Thickness
36 mm
4 mm
32 mm snap
Cotter hole
14 mm dia
2 mm
16 mm plug
Chapter 9, Page 3 of 8
Wear location
Wearing piece
Locating pins
25 mm dia
Wear
limit
6 mm
6 mm
Suggested no
go gauge
snap gauge 12
mm thick
19 mm snap
Component
Bent link
Wear
location
47
mm
dia hole
78 mm
U gap
Bent link
Pin
on
draw
hook
Screw
Trunnion
LH/RH
Knuckle
-do-do-
Wear
location
61
mm
dia hole
47
mm
dia hole
42
mm
dia stem
Chapter 9, Page 4 of 8
Wear
limit
2 mm
Suggested
no go gauge
63 mm flat
2 mm
49 mm flat
3mm
39 mm snap
mm
55 x 6.35
mm
k/thread
Thread
55.635x6
.35
K/thread
76
mm
thickness
46
mm
dia pin
Suggested
no go gauge
49 mm flat
3 mm
on each
arm
2mm
77 mm to go
85 mm no
go gauge
58 mm flat
1 mm
K
thread
profile
gauge
K
thread
profile
gauge
1 mm
4 mm
72 mm snap
2 mm
44 mm snap
Table 9.7
Component
Straight
link
Straight
link
Bent link
60
dia
Wear
limit
2 mm
902
ICF
TYPE
BUFFER
MAINLINE COACHES
OF
BG
Chapter 9, Page 5 of 8
Table 9.8
Components
Buffer Assembly
Buffer casing
(cast steel)
(Forged)
Buffer
plungercast steel
(Forged)
Rubber
buffer
pads
Buffer spindle
Destruction tube
Recoil spring
Recoil
spring
parting plate
Recoil
spring
Washer
Buffing
spring
parting plate
Face plate for
buffer plunger
M.24 Hex Head
bolt
Drawings
SK 92090(existing) &
Sk 98145(new)
W/BD 392 & Sk
94043 (with enlarged
base)
W/BD-393 & Sk 94044
(with enlarged base)
W/BD-359 & Sk 94255
(with flat face)
W/BD-355
&
S~
94256(with flat face)
SK 96002 and STR.
no. C- 9501 (Rev . 2)
W/BD- 353
ICF drg. No. T-2-2-602
W/BD-2252
W/BD-2253
W/BD-350
W/BD-2261
Sk 94254
ICF drawing No. T-22-503
902b
Inspection
workshops
and
Maintenance
i)
ii)
Record keeping
in
Dismantling
Take out split pin and unscrew nuts
holding
buffer
casing
with
underframe head stock and remove
buffer assembly from the coach .
Remove split cotter and nut from
buffer spindle and separate buffer
plunger from casing and take out all
components for inspection .
iv)
Table 9.9
Wear
location
Wear
limit
Suggeste d
gauge
Buffer casing
body
wall
thickness 11.5
mm
5.5 mm in
wall
thickness
Inside
micrometer
Fixing hole in
the base 26
mm dia
2 mm on
dia
28mm flat
Wear
location
Wear
limit
4mm
Micrometer
Buffer plunger
tub e wall
thickness 9
mm
Plunger
face/face plate
19 mm
11mm
Buffer casing
(Ref. drawing W/BD392/393 AND Sk 94043 & 94044)
1905 mm
curvature
gauge with
depth
measurement.
Chapter 9, Page 6 of 8
Suggested
gauge
Wear location
Wear
permitted
Buffer spindle
body 40 mm dia
Threads M 39
5 mm
0.5 mm
Suggested
no go
gauge
35 mm
snap
thread
profile
gauge
Destruction Tube
(Ref. ICF drg. No. T-2-2-602.)
v)
Assembly of Buffer
Chapter 9, Page 7 of 8
903
EXAMINATION
AND
REPAIR
PRACTICE
IN
CARRIAGE
MAINTENANCE DEPOT
903a
Draw Gear
ii)
iii) Schedule C
903b
Buffing gear
i)
Primary
&
Secondary
Maintenance, Schedule A and
Schedule B
*****
Chapter 9, Page 8 of 8
ii)
Schedule C
Rolling Gear
CHAPTER 10
ROLLING GEAR
i)
1001
1001a
Introduction
ii)
Axles
1600 - 1
1001b
130
145
172
178
152
145
130
913
915
130
14%%p2R
45%%d
2.5
INCL
IN E
INCLINE 1 IN 20
30
+3
W/WL-1660/R
1 IN
W/WL-1660
Rolling Gear
-1
18%%p2R
14R
14.5R
+5
22
PROFILE TO GAUGE
N9
6
130
-0
70%%D%%P1%%D
%%P2
NOTE:-
47%%d-30'%%p1%%d
38R
38R
N9
6R
60%%d
5R
10%%D
25%%p1 CRS
51R
OF RIM.
10
N9
TO BE MACHINED IF NECESSARY TO
+10
* %%c260
+0
%%c172- 0.4
151
8.7
%%c660
-0
+10
190.5
18 7
-0
10
11%%d%%P1%%d
N9
230R
51R
165R
91
153
65.5
230 R
+3
-0
190
* %%c260
+0
%%C165- 3
655.
-0
-0
+3
+5
-0
+3
10
+3
-0
%%C918- 0
+5
29
22
763
+10
-5
INSIDE
DIA. OF RIM
70%%d
63.5
190
13
813
+1
-0
LIMIT
DIA.
11%%D%%P1%%D
47%%d-30'
44
180 R
(91,328.9)
151
8.7
29.4
2.5
1 IN
(0,0)
219
6R
R
14
10 0R
151
8.7
1 IN 20
330R
13
28.5
-0
N
6
+1
N6
191
6R
(65.5,100.3)
14 .5
R
%%c 915
N9
65
130
73.7
%%p1
63.5
+3
W/WL-1660/R
FIGURE 10.2
ROLLED SIZE
-0
WHEEL PROFILE
WHEEL & AXLE SOLID
WA/WL-32
W/WL-1660
N1 N2
MATL.
N3 N4 N5 N6
28.5
GR. No.
Ra m 1.6 3.2
6.3 12.5 25 50
SYMBOL
N12
FORM
WEIGHT
RLY. PATT.
SCALE
REF. DRG.
2/94
8/93
4/91
7/85
DATE
DO NOT SCALE
NOTE 1 DELETED
RADII CENTRES SPECIFIED &
CD/2/94
CD/57/93
S.No. 1070 OF
TOLERANCESMC/WA/TENDER
ADDED
672 OF
DRAWING SNo.
REVISED
MC/WA/TENDER
I.R
ALT No.
AUTHY.
S.No.1211/1 OF
TOLERANCES MC/WA/TENDER
ADDED
DESCRIPTION
SS/4/02
3/90
TREAT
SIZE
N7 N8 N9 N10 N11
SYMBOL
TO IS:3073
SURFACE
Ra m
ROUGHNESS VALUE
NOMINAL SIZE
GR. NO.
2/02
Sd.
Sd.
Sd.
WHERE USED
No.
ASSEMBLY
IRS
Sd.
Sd.
Sd.
CKR.
W/WL-1660
W/WL-1660/R
I.R. PART No.
.
ASSLY
Rolling Gear
191
1473
26.5
130
R40
R75
R75
152
145
AXLE
Figure 10.3
iii)
Maintenance
Workshop
Procedure
in
the
Table 10.1
Type of
wheel
ICF solid
c)
New
915
Min. Shop
issue
836
e)
Inspection of axle
Rolling Gear
1003
REPAIR
PROCEDURES
FOR
DIFFERENT
CATEGORIES
OF
WHEELS
Detailed procedure for carrying out
repairs to different categories of wheel
sets is described below:
1003a
wheels
are
of
two
1002a
CATEGORY OF WHEELS
1002c
A bent axle,
Dimensional deviations on a journal
/ wheel seat
Rolling Gear
127
63.5
28.5
9R
13
10
0
100
33
0R
329
14
R
5
1 IN 2.
1 IN 20
20
33.5
FIGURE - 1
65.5
91
91
14
R
R
0
10
13
10
100
33
0R
329
1 IN 2.5
1 IN 20
22
35.5
65.5
FIGURE - 2
(22 MM THICK FLANGE)
R
10
0
100
13
11
.5
33
0
329
14
R
1 IN 2.5
1 IN 20
25
38.5
FIGURE - 3
65.5
SCALE
P
C
D
1:1
PAINT 9/92
T
JS
B.G. RDSO[C]
FIGURE 10.4
INTERMEDIATE
WORN WHEEL
PROFILE
FOR COACHING
STOCK
SKETCH-92082
1003b
0.8
Wheel
portion
1.6
seat
Middle portion
3.2
for
Prescribed (RA)
value for Surface
finish in microns
Journal portion
The serviceable wheel discs are rebored on the vertical boring machine.
Care should be taken that the finished
bore is straight, concentric to the tread
of the wheel and has a smooth surface
free from ridges, scores and chatter
marks. A radius of 2.5 mm is provided
on the hub to facilitate mounting. It
must be made after the finishing cut.
Inspection of re-bored wheel disc
Axle portions
Rolling Gear
is
Rolling Gear
Rolling Gear
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1004
1005
ROLLER BEARINGS
1005a
1005b
T.
15
O.
P.
1.4
M V
IR
03
O N N
O
W
2A
Rolling Gear
24
C
O
43
N 0
S N O 2
04
L
I W
S.
O.
P.
468
6 E
I. R.
30
O N N
.
N 6. C O
ON BOTH JOURNAL
Newly assembled wheel set should be checked for the distance between inner face of wheel i.e. 1600 +2/-1 mm using Wheel Distance Gauge.
The wheels to be gauged on a level track after taking off from coaching vehicle.
Under loaded conditions the limits are not applicable.
Scale
Moving End
Fixed end
Locking knob
SPRIT LEVEL
INDICATOR
Rolling Gear
Sr.
Nature of Work
Equipment/Facility required
3
4
5
6
7
Sr.
Rolling Gear
Nature of Work
Equipment/Facility required
Magnifying glass with light
10
11
12
13
14
1005d
Inspection of Roller
Mounted Position
Bearings
in
Rolling Gear
Table 10.4
(Reference Letter no. MC/ RB/ Genl
dtd. 10.7.98)
Bearing make
SKF
FAG/NORMA
NEI/NBC
n
Radial clearance in mm
0.105 to 0.296 mm
0.080 to 0.185 mm
0.080 to 0.190 mm
1005f
Lubrication
The quantity of grease filled per axle
box
SKF make bearing
Other make bearings
Torque
wrenches
should
be
periodically checked for accuracy with
torque wrench tester.
Bend all tabs of locking plate against
the sides of the bolt using adjustable
rib joint plier.
The date, the month, and the year of
attention and workshop code should be
punched on the locking plate in case of
retaining ring and on the annular nut in
case of annular nut type arrangement
(see figure 10.9)
of
Figure 10.9
2.00 kg
1.75 kg
i)
iv)
Collar
Rolling Gear
Figure 10.10
Chapter 10, Page 13 of 23
Felt ring
Rolling Gear
Figure 10.11
1006
1006a
Dismounting of bearing
Figure 10.12
Rolling Gear
Table 10.5
New bearings
0.145 to 0.190 mm
Maximum permissible clearance for
bearing in service
SKF make
0.33 mm
FAG/NORMA
0.270 mm
makes
NBC makes
0.295mm
1006b
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Figure 10.13
Rolling Gear
n
n
Temperature
and
cycle
time
controllers
Auto demagnetizer
Temperature and cycle time indicator
Auto alarm to indicate completion of
cycle
Figure 10.15
Figure 10.14
Oil used in oil bath should be fortified
with anti-oxidation,
anti-foaming
additives.
Recommended oils for this purpose are:
Oil
Enklo 68
Servosystem 68
Supplier
HPCL
IOC
1007
PRECAUTIONS
MAINTENANCE
BEARING
FOR
ROLLER
OF
1008
Rolling Gear
Defect
Effect on Bearing
Remedial Measures
1.
2.
1.
2.
Rolling Gear
Defect
Effect on Bearing
Remedial Measures
6.
Fitment of substandard/
improper size end locking
bolts/ screws.
may
1.
2.
1009
EXAMINATION
AND
REPAIR
PRACTICE
IN
CARRIAGE
MAINTENANCE DEPOT
Depot maintenance staff should ensure the
following things in respect of proper
functioning and safety of Rolling gear:
1009a
ii)
Rolling Gear
v)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Rolling Gear
Rolling Gear
Annexure - 10.1
ii
iii
iv
A.
Rolling Gear
The general requirement prior to ultrasonic testing of axle are surface preparation, selection of
couplant, care and checking of probe.
1.
SURFACE PREPARATION
Surface preparation of the areas where the probe is to be applied is necessary for maximum
transmission of ultrasonic energy in the test specimen. It is essential that the surface should be clear of
loose paint, dirt and loose scale. Ultrasonic testing of an axle is carried out from axle ends journals and
from body.
1.1
Axle end
Ultrasonic testing of an axle by far-end and near end low angle scanning is carried out from the axle
ends.
The end faces are usually stamped with cast Nos. and other identification numbers and this process
displaces the surface material into raised areas thereby resulting in an inadequate acoustic coupling.
The raised areas must, therefore, be removing by filling, or by using energy cloth, while cleaning of
the end faces, care must be taken not to allow filling debris, dirt and grit to enter the axle box or roller
bearings. The end faces should be cleaned by cotton cloth soaked in kerosene oil. All the precautions
as mentioned in maintenance schedule for disassembly of the axle box covers and end face fitment
should be strictly observed.
1.2
Axle Journals
When using the high angle scanning techniques on axle journals the surface must be made free of dirt,
girt using cotton cloth soaked in kerosene oil.
1.3
Axle Body
When using the high angle scanning techniques on axle body, loose paint, rust and scale must be
removed and the surface must be free from dirt and grit. Some axle body surfaces may have machining
marks and these may cause some loss of ultrasonic energy but there should not be any difficulty from
this source unless the machining is rough. In such cases or in case where axle body is in forged
condition it is advisable to use adequate quantity of grease as coupling media.
Where it has been necessary to remove protective paint, the surface should be repainted as per relevant
specimen or as recommended in maintenance schedule before the axle is put into service.
2.
CHOICE OF COUPLANT
The choice of couplant depends on the condition of probing surface. The following couplant may be
used for ultrasonic testing of axles.
1.
2.
3.
3.1
Rolling Gear
The inspection and checking of the probes must be carried out periodically.
3.2
3.3
4.
4.1
Probes should be handled very carefully. The probes should be carefully packed in cotton. U-foam etc,
in order to avoid any damage during transportation from one place to another.
In any circumstances no attempt should be made to open the probes by the operator as the crystal used
inside the probe is very brittle. If any probe shows loss of sensitivity, it should be sent for repair to
maintenance cell or to the suppliers.
4.2
The probes and probe cable should be cleaned daily after completion of the work and characteristics
of probe should be checked at regular interval. The probes should never dismantled in any way for
cleaning but it should be thoroughly wiped over with clean cloth. At no time the probes should be
immersed in the liquid paraffin.
*****
Interior Fittings
CHAPTER 11
INTERIOR FITTINGS
1101
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1102
Table 11.1
SCHEDULE OF PASSENGER AMENITY FITTINGS FOR BG COACHES
1876
505
NA
NA
NA
2010
610
1870
480
NA
415
1676
480
NA
450
--
340
340
340
340
--
420
405
405
405
405
405
405
610
NA
900
900
NA
900
NA
575
430
700
575
430
570
570
1830
NA
2312
1700
1575
1575
1575
680
785
600 Long
635 Trans
NA
785
1835
550
NA
450
305
Double
decker
505
635
Sleeper
505
First class
General
2312
Day coach
6) Bay width
I. Four berths/
general component
560 Long
570 Trans
560 Long
570 Trans
Chair car
2Tier
sleeper
Description
Interior Fittings
Day coach
General
NA
1500
1050
880
880
880
NA
565
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
535
450
535
NA
NA
NA
710
710
535
450
535
340
535
340
535
340
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
13
17
20
12
20
27
25
36
40
34
40
40
60
60
60
72
30
16
16
Yes
30
16
16
Yes
30
16
16
No
30
16
16
Yes
30
Yes
30
11
No
30
11
No
30
11
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Double
decker
Sleeper
3Tier
sleeper
1150
2Tier
sleeper
First class
Description
Interior Fittings
B. Fannage
i) No of fans
a) Compartment
b) Lavatory
One for
two
berths
One
bay
per
One
bay
per
One per
lav.
One
lav.
per
One
lav.
per
400 mm
(S)
300 mm (F)
300 mm (F)
200 mm
(F)
200 mm (F)
200 mm (F)
Double
decker
General
Day coach
sleeper
First class
Chair car
2Tier
sleeper
Description
One
for
two
row
One
per
lav.
One
per
berth
3 per bay
3 per
bay
3 per
bay
3 per
bay
No
No
No
No
No
400
mm
(S)
No
400 mm (F)
400 mm
(F)
No
400
mm
(F)
No
No
400
mm
(S)
No
No
400
mm
(F)
200
mm
(F)
yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
NA
Yes
Yes
NA
NA
NA
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Interior Fittings
sleeper
Day coach
General
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No.
Yes
NA
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
NA
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Pouches
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No.
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
one
No
Yes
Yes
One
No
Yes
Yes
One
No
Yes
Yes
One
Yes
Yes
No
One
No
Yes
No
Nil
No
Yes
No
Nil
No
Yes
No
Nil
No
Yes
No
Nil
except
one
except one
Except one
Exc
ept
one
Yes
Excep
t one
all
all
all
all
Double
decker
First class
l) Coat hook
m) Foot steps
n) Magazine pouch
o) Wash basin
i) Compartment
ii) Door way
p) Ward robe with
fixed hangers
q) Water cooler
r) Drinking water
with container
s) Thali rack
t) Linen room
u) Rings below
berths for securing
luggage
12) Lavatory fittings
a) Shower bath
b) Wash basin
c) Towel rail
d)
Flushing
commode
e) Flushing pan
2Tier
sleeper
Description
Chair car
Interior Fittings
The schedule of safety items for passengers to be available in the interior of the coach is given in Table 11.2
Table 11.2
Safety requirements
SCHEDULE OF PASSENGER AMENITY FITTINGS FOR BG COACHES
Day coach
One
One
One
One
Alarm
Alternat
e
Alternat
e
Alternat
e
Double
decker
General
First class
sleeper
Chair car
2Tier
sleeper
Description
Tota
l
ii)Lavatory
iii) Corridor
b) Internal latches
at top and bottom
on body side doors
c) Provision of pad
locking
arrangement from
outside on one
body side door
d) Internal latch
and shout bolts
with notched
stopper and
outside pad locking
arrangement for
compartment
sliding door
e) Throw over latch
and Pad Locking
arrangement for
sliding of vestibule
f) Shout bolts and
sliding door bolts
for swing doors
and pad locking for
rolling shutters of
vestibules
g) Latches for
windows shutters
of body side doors
and partition walls
h) Fire
extinguishers
i) Safety bars on all
window opening
j) Windows
shutters
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Yes
Bay
Yes
Bay
Yes
Bay
Yes
Bay
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
NA
NA
Yes
NA
NA
NA
Yes
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Yes
Yes
NA
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
i) Glass shutters
ii) Louvre shutters
iii) Louvre cum
gauge shutters
iv) Frosted single
glass sealed
window
v) Louvre cum
Frosted glass
liftable type
shutters
Interior Fittings
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1103
FURNISHING
MATERIALS
PASSENGER COACHES
ON
Interior Fittings
1103c
Attention in Workshop
1103e
Anti-Pilferage Measures
In order to prevent theft of amenity
fittings from coaches, workshop should
carry out anti-pilferage measures on all
coaches during POH, as prescribed by the
Chief Mechanical Engineer or RDSO
especially for the following items:
i)
Mirror and mirror shelf.
ii)
Soap dish.
iii)
Ash t ray.
iv)
Push cock.
v)
Wash basin.
vi)
Tumbler holder.
vii)
Hand hold.
viii)
Upper berth hold.
ix)
Coat hook.
x)
Flushing valve.
xi)
Window frame.
xii)
Folding table.
xiii)
Lotah cock.
xiv)
Lotah shelf.
xv)
Shower rose.
xvi)
Wall protector.
xvii)
Foothold bracket.
xviii)
Fans
xix)
Lights
Examination and repair practice
Carriage Maintenance Depot
in
i)
Examine
laminated
panels
&
mouldings for damages /cracks.
Visually inspect passenger amenity
fittings, replace if found damaged /
deficient.
Examine visually curtain cloth in AC
coaches and attend if necessary.
Examine
ventilation
grills
for
damages.
Examine luggage racks / bunks for
breakage.
Examine push cock, flush valve for
function.
Check and attend leakage in pipes,
fittings and shower ro ses in lavatory.
Clean drain grills and drain holes in
bath room and wash basin if found
choke up.
Check and replace damage/missing
mirrors/shelves/soap dishes.
1104
WINDOWS
1104a
1104b
Interior Fittings
5-
a)
b)
Windows of AC Coaches
AC Coaches are fitted with double glass
sealed windows. Two types of sealed
windows are presently in use and they are
as under:
1104d
1104e
1104f
Interior Fittings
1104g
Broken,
cracked,
defaced
or
scratched glass should be replaced
and the window frame repaired as
necessary. Glass should be cleaned
with lime and detergent before
refitting. The rubber or felt lining
between the glass and the frame
should be changed every time the
glass is removed. Chrome plated
moulding, if provided, should be
rechrome plated before fitting.
1104h
Interior Fittings
1105
FLOOR
1105a
Introduction
The use of PVC flooring is used in both
upper and lower class coaches. RDSO
vide their letter No.MC/CB/Flooring dt.
26.04.89 have circulated the guidelines for
using PVC flooring on main line coaches.
As per RDSO s letter No.MC/CB/Flooring
Dated:
08.04.96.
12mm
Compreg
floorboards shall be used whenever
floorboards of complete coach require
replacement. Use of PVC flooring
improves the aesthetics of compartments,
besides providing for hygienic condition
and easy maintenance.
This arrangement is also considerably
lighter (approx.1.1t) as compared to
Decolite flooring. It also prevents
corrosion of under frames by eliminating
water seapage. For this purpose, proper
laying technique, sealing of joints with
thermo -welding process and selection of
right shades are very essential.
1105b
4.
5.
1105c
Material description
1105d
Interior Fittings
2.1 Kg.
2.1 Kg.
0.4 Kg.
0.2 Kg
0.2 Kg
5.0 Kg.
Interior Fittings
Figure 11.3
Figure 11.4
Figure 11.5
v)
Figure 11.1
iii) Thermo-Welding (Hot Air welding)
Proper thermo-welding of PVC flooring is
utmost
necessary
for
obtaining
satisfactory bonding/results. Thermowelding of PVC flooring provides
impervious continuous floor surface.
iv) Grooving
A grooving tool (hand or automatic)
alongwith a straight edge/scale (see
Figure 11.2) is used to groove the butting
edges of the seam to approximately two
third of the thickness of the wear layer of
PVC flooring. This will leave a semi-
Figure 11.2
circular groove for thermo welding (see
Figure 11.3 & 11.4).
Welding
Figure 11.6
Interior Fittings
vi) Trimming
When the weld has cooled to room
temperature, it should be trimmed off flush
to the surface of the material with a
trimming Spatula (Figure 11.7). If trimming
is done before the welding cord has
cooled, it will shrink below the surface of
the flooring. If at this stage, the spatula
disturbs the weld, this indicates that a
positive joint has not been achieved. The
existing weld should then be removed and
the seam must be re -welded. To ensure
that proper bond of PVC flooring to
compreg base floor is obtained, allow it to
dry for 24 hrs. in normal atmospheric
temperature. All the edges of PVC flooring
in the compartments should be sealed with
water sealing compound to avoid seepage
of water.
Fevicol SR - 998
vi) Water proof sealing compound Water proof sealing compound to
IS: 1580-1960.
Maintenance Instructions
i)
Lavatory Flooring
All new coaches are provided with
stainless steel inlay pasted with single
piece PVC sheet to ICF drawing no.
ICF/STD-4-1 001 in lavatories. Coaches
having other types of lavatory floorings
should be provided with stainless steel
lavatory inlays during POH.
1105g
Figure 11.7
iv)
1105h
ii)
in
Primary/Secondary examination,
Schedule A and B examination
ii)
Inspect
and
attend
torn/damage/ cracked PVC
flooring.
Examine and attend opened
PVC joints.
Examine Drain holes in trough
floor for accumulation of water
due to clogging if noticed,
inspect affected area for
corrosion
1106
Interior Fittings
iii)
Class of coach
Furnishing material
Cushion material
Same as above
Interior Fittings
1106c
ii)
iii)
1107
DOORS
1107a
Examination in Workshop
i) Body side Doors
Primary/Secondary examination
Examine visually curtain clo th in
AC coaches attend if necessary.
Examine middle and upper berth
chains.
Examine the holding / securing
brackets for seat and berths and
attend if necessary.
Examine snack table in upper class
coaches for damages and rectify if
necessary.
Sliding doors
compartments
of
upper
class
Broken
glass
in
the
observation
windows
provided in sliding doors of
AC First class coaches
should be replaced.
Interior Fittings
Interior Fittings
b)
c)
1108
VESTIBULE
1108a
UIC type rubber vestibule (RDSO sketch 99056) and Foot Plate arrangement
i) Conversion to UIC type vestibule
1107b
Description of
item/ component
Steel
complete
Upper flange
Lateral
flange
side
Rubber packing
6x75x1900
Rubber packing
6x75x1500
Locking plate
Locking plate
Locking plate
Locking plate
10
Special screw
11
Spring
M10
i)
Primary/Secondary
examination,
Schedule A, B and C Examination
frame
No. off
/ assly.
1
Drawing No.
RDSO
99057
SK-
RDSO
85248
SK-
RDSO
99060
SK-
RDSO
99058
SK-
17
RDSO
99059
SK-
washer
53
IS:3063-65
tab-1 type B
12
70
IS:1363-92
Pt.3. Tab-1
13
36
14
10
IS:2998-82,
Gr.1, Tab-1
Sr.
No.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Description of
item/ component
Foot
plate
arrangement
Support bracket
for foot plate
Vestibule door
sill arrangement
Holding device
for foot plate
Pin
No. off
/ assly.
1
Drawing
No.
RDSO SK99057
Washer M20
Split pin dia.
4X36
Connecting
component
Foot
plate
holding bracke t
LP sheet
Spring plate
2
2
Interior Fittings
T-2-5-699
RDSO SK99059
2
2
2
2
IS:549
ICF/SK-25-078
RDSO SK99057
RDSO SK99058
1108c
in
i)
Primary/Secondary
examination,
Schedule A, B & C examination'
Examine
visually
rolling
shutters/sliding doors of vestibule
for smooth working.
********
Painting
CHAPTER 12
PAINTING
1201
1201a
GENERAL
After the coach body is fully repaired
and the flooring work completed, it
should be swept and cleaned of all dust,
shavings, etc., before the coach is placed
in the Paint shop for painting and
polishing.
1201b
1201c
1202d
1202e
1202f
1202g
1202
PAINT SCHEDULE
Annexure 12.1)
1202a
1202h
1202b
1202i
`A'
1202c
(Refer
1202j
Painting
AIRCRAFT BLUE
5
7
75
SATIN BLUE
AIRCRAFT BLUE
Figure II : Air Brake Trains other than Rajdhani & Shatabdi Express
A. Side wall upto 75 mm below window and from 75 mm above window - Air Craft blue shade No. 108
B. Side wall window area 75 mm above and below windows - Satin blue shade No. 177
NOTE:
1. For special rakes, instructions as per Rly. Board's letter No. 76/M (C)/137 / 31 dated 5.6.1986 shall be followed.
2. Postal portion of partial postal vans shall be painted with postal red.
3. Existing procedures for roof and end wall painting, lettering and exterior markings continue unchanged.
4. All finishing paints should be to specification No. IS:8662-93 and coloures to specification No. IS:5-94
Painting
RDSO Sketch No. CSC-1723. Approved vide Railway Board's letter No. 97/M (C)/ 137 / 20 dated 23.6.98
Painting
60
7 88
60
OFFWHITE
SIGNAL RED BAND
11 4
OFFWHITE
O FFWHI TE
OFFWHITE
SIGNAL RED BAND
SIGNALRED
PALE CREAM
50
1 00
OXFORD BLUE
A. Side walls upto lower window sill - Oxford Blue shade No. 105
B. Side wall above lower window sill - Pale cream shade No. 352
C. Band of 100 mm at a distance of 50 mm below lower window sill - Pale cream shade No. 352
RDSO Sketch No. CSC-1723. Approved vide Railway Board's letter No. 97/M (C)/ 137 / 20 dated 23.6.98
FIGURE 12.1b
Pa inting
1202k
Painting
1203
1204
1205
INTERIOR PAINTING
1206
PAINTING OF PARTS
MARKING
OF
COACHES
TOGETHER WITH EXTERIOR
All lettering on coaches should be
according to the sizes prescribed in the
marking diagrams for the type of coach to
which they pertain (refer RDSO drawing
number CSC-970). Anti telescopic coach
end walls should be marked with yellow
stripes as sketch no. 77356. Each should
be marked with following details:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
Painting
1207
TOOLS
AND
PAINTING
1207a
Types of brushes
1207b
PLANTS
FOR
i)
ii)
iii)
Lettering brushes:
iv)
Stencil brushes
v)
Putty knife
i)
Pallet knife
ii)
Falling knife
iii)
Haking knife
Table 12.1
Schedules
Station
code
Date
Disinfected
Alarm chain periodical
examination done
Dash pot oil checked
Side bearer oil level
checked
Over head tank flushed
Intermediate lifting
DA valve examined
1207c
Scrapers
i)
Shave tukes
ii)
Triangular
iii)
Semi circular
iv)
Diagonal
xi)
xii)
1207e
1207f
Safety apparels
i)
Goggles
ii)
Helmet
iii)
Gum boots
Painting
Annexure 12.1
2nd Day
3rd Day
One coat of brush filler followed by spot putty to fill up holes/dents where required.
4th Day
5th Day
Rub down with silicon carbide water proof paper Gr. 120 & 220
6thDay
7th Day
Flat with silicon Carbide water proof Paper Gr. 320. One coat of enamel finishing.
8th Day
Flat with silicon Carbide water proof Paper Gr. 400 and apply a second coat of
synthetic enamel finishing.
9th Day
Lettering with Golden yellow and miscellaneous work (cleaning window glasses
etc.)
Annexure 12.2
Cleaning with soap solution or any other cleaning solution and wash thoroughly with
water touch up damaged portion with primer recommended under A sch edule .
2nd Day
3rd Day
Flat with silicon carbide water proof paper Gr. 120 & 220, and apply one coat of
finishing enamel.
4th Day
Flat with silicon carbide water proof Gr. 400 and apply a second coat of synthetic
enamel finishing.
5th Day
*****
Appendix
APPENDIX- A
TRANSPORTATION
CODE
ART
CT
CTS
CZACEN
ERR
ERU
FCS
FSCN
GS
LR
NMG
OHE
PPS
RA
RAAC
RD
RE
RH
RHV
RK
RN
RS
RT
RZ
SLR
SMN
VP
VPC
WACCNEN
WCB
WSCZACEN
WCD
WCRAC
WCTAC
WFACEN
36
37
WFC
WGACCN
38
WGACCW
39
WACCWEN
40
WGFAC
41
WGFACCW
DETAILS
ACCIDENT AND TOOL VAN OR RELIEF VAN
TOURIST CAR
TOURIST CAR FOR 2ND CLASS PASSENGERS
AIR CONDITIONED CHAIR CAR WITH END ON GENERATION
FOUR / SIX WHEELER
FOUR / SIX WHEELER SELF PROPELLED TOWER VAN
FIRST CLASS COUPE AND SECOND CLASS
FIRST CUM II CLASS 3-TIER SLEEPER
SECOND CLASS FITTED WITH SELF GENERATING EQUIPMENT
LUGGAGE WITH BRAKE VAN
NEW MODI FIED GOODS
OVER HEAD EQUIPEMNT INSPECTION CAR
FULL BOGIE POSTAL VAN
INSPECTION CARRIAGE ( ADMINISTRATIVE)
AIR CONDITIONED INSPECTION CAR
INSPECTION CARRIAGE (SUBORDINATE)
INSTRUCTION VAN (MOBILE TRAINING CAR)
MEDICAL VAN
AUXILIARY MEDICAL VAN
DYNAMOMETER CAR
GENERATING VAN
STORES VAN
ACCIDENT AND TOOL VAN OR RELIEF VAN
TRACK RECORDING CAR
SECOND CLASS LUGGAGE AND BRAKE VAN
POWER CAR WITH MID ON G ENERATION
PARCEL VAN
PARCEL VAN CONVERTED
VESTIBULED AC 3 -TIER WITH END-ONGENERATION
VESTIBULED PANTRY CAR
VESTIBULED AC CHAIR CAR WITH END-ON -GENERATION
VESTIBULED DINING CAR
VESTIBULED AI R CONDTIONED TWIN CAR
VESTIBULED AIR CONDITIONED TOURIST CAR
VESTIBULED AIR CONDITIONED FIRST CLASS WITH END ON
GENERATION
VESTIBULED FIRST CLASS
VESTIBULED AIR CONDITIONED THREE TIER WITH SELF
GENERATING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
VESTIBULED AIR CONDITIONED TWO TIER WITH SELF
GENERATING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
VESTIBULED AIR CONDITIONED TWO TIER SLEEPER WITH END
ON GENERATION
VESTIBULED AIR CONDITIONED FIRST CLASS WITH SELF
GENERATING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
VESTIBULED FIRST CUM AC 2-TIER SLEEPER
S. No.
TRANSPORTATION
CODE
42
WGSCN
43
WGSCNLR
44
WGSCZ
45
46
WGSCZAC
WGSD
47
48
WLRRM
WSCZACEN
49
WSLRN
Appendix
DETAILS
Appendix
APPENDIX B
(when opened)
2.
(when opened)
3.
(when opened)
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Dashpot oil
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
(when opened)
20.
21.
22.
DA valve diaphragm
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
Appendix
Appendix
APPENDIX - C
MODIFCATIONS IN BG COACHING STOCK
(RDSOs Letter No. MC/CB/MARS Dtd. 24.06.98)
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Description of Modifications
RDSO SK - 92082
& 91146
RDSO SK - 88105
& 93236
RDSO SK - 85070
alt. 3
ICF / SK-0-1-182
ICF Drg. No. T-02-637 alt. a
Drg. No. C/BE4501 alt 7
Spec. C-9406
(Rev.1)
RCF Drg. No.
M1000517
RDSO SK - 96078
RDSO SK 96006
Applicability
Category
Railways and
Production Units
Production Units
only
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Completed, may
be treated as
standard
Railways only
A
A
A
Spec.
A
A
Spec.
Spec.
A
RDSO SK 98127
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Production Units
only. Railways to
make new
purchase as per
revised drawing.
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways only
Spec.
Railways and
Production Units
RDSO SK - 84102
RDSO SK - 90088
RDSO SK - 90068
Sr.
No.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Description of Modifications
Railways and
Production Units
Railways only
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Completed, may
be treated as
standard
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways only
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Spec.
39
40
41
Appendix
RDSO SK 87020
ICF Drg. No.
WLRRM4-7-3-402
alt. 'n' &
WLRRM4-7-3-401
alt. 'g'
ICF Drg. No. SLR 9-0-001
ICF Drg. No.
ICF/SK -6-1-234
RDSO SK 85121
(existing), 85120
(new)
RDSO SK 83014
alt. 1
RDSO SK 85020
RDSO SK 84162
RDSO SK 76020
alt. 7
ICF Drg. No. ICF/
SK-1-1-135 and
RDSO SK- 75108
alt. 1
-
Applicability
Category
A
A
A
A
A
A
Railways only
Railways and
Production Units
Railways only
B
B
Sr.
No.
42
43
Description of Modifications
Provision of FRP banjo shutter as
alternative to aluminium shutter
Appendix
44
45
46
47
RDSO SK 96102
alt. 1
RDSO SK - 82010
alt. 5
RDSO SK - 94026
& 94027
RDSO SK- 93286
RDSO SK - 90005
alt. 2
ICF Drg. No.
DMU/DPC-5-4-002
ICF Drg. No. TLR4 -2-717, SLR - 42-002, WLRRM -42-604 , WLRRM-4
-2-605
RDSO Spec. No. C9502
STR C- 9407 type
II
ICF/STD-4 -1-002
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
RDSO SK - 96040
ICF / SK-6-3-324
Applicability
Category
Railways only
Railways only
Production units
only
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
( in vestibule with
sliding doors)
Railways only
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways only
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Production Units
only. Railways in
corrosion repair
coaches
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
B
B
B
B
B
C
C
Sr.
No.
62
63
64
Appendix
Description of Modifications
Spec. C- 9501
(Rev. I), SK- 96002
alt. 3
RDSO Sk- 79061 &
Sk- 79067
RDSO-SK. 98161
(Alt.1), ICF/STD
3 -4-005, ICF/SK.
5-4-168
Applicability
Category
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
Railways and
Production Units
C
C
Appendix
APPENDIX D
RDSO No.
01
C-6803
02
03
C-6904
C-7103
04
C-7301
05
C-7511
06
C-7512
07
C-7601
08
09
C-7602
C-7607
10
C-7703
11
C-7717
12
C-7807
13
C-7808
14
C-7809
15
C-7817
16
C-7901
17
C-7902
18
19
C-7907
C-8105
20
C-8107
21
22
C-8108
C-8207
Description
Maintenance and repair procedure for hydraulic shock
absorbers used on coaching stock.
Instructions for repair of corroded ICF coaches BG
Instructions for examina tion and maintenance of bogies
and undergear of coach nominated to run at sanctioned
speed of 110 kmph (BG).
Direct admission valve for passenger coaches maintenance
instructions.
Instructions for adjustment of buffer height of ICF built
BG coaches in workshops and depots.
Hindi version of C-7511, adjustment of buffer height of
ICF BG coaches.
Description of water raising apparatus and instructions for
filling water in coaches fitted with under slung water tanks.
Instructions for corrosion repairs ICF built BG coaches.
Instructions for inspection, repair and manufacturing
procedure for helical springs of ICF & BEML built
coaches.
Instructions for inspection and maintenance of roller
bearing axle boxes of BG/ICF bogies..
Instructions for maintenance of axle box guide
arrangement for mainline ICF built coaches (BG/MG)
Instruction for maintenance of bogie and under gear of
Rajdhani express coaches (BG) (for shops and maintenance
depots)
Hindi version of C-7807, maintenance of bogie and
undergear of Rajdhani coaches.
Instruction for inspection, repair and manufacturing
procedure for helical springs of ICF & Jessop's EMU stock.
Instructions for inspection and maintenance of direct
mounted roller bearing axle boxes of BG/ICF bogies.
Maintenance and repair procedure of Gabriel vertical
hydraulic shock absorber.
Hindi version of C-7901, maintenance and repair procedure
Gabriel shock absorber.
Wheel and axle manual
Schedule of requirements for asbestos sheets roof ceiling of
railway passenger coaches.
Schedule of requirements for nylon bush for brake gear for
mainline coach.
Hindi version of C-8107, nylon bushes for coaches
Schedule of requirement for FRP Battery Box.
S.No.
RDSO No.
23
24
C-8211
C-8215
25
C-8217
26
27
28
C-8219
C-8303
Rev. I
C-8305
29
C-8409
30
C-8415
31
32
C-8419
Rev. I
C-8421
33
C-8515
34
C-8517
35
C-8518
36
37
38
C-8519
C-8527
C-8531
39
C-8533
40
C-8605
41
C-8606
42
C-8623
43
44
C-8625
C-8626
45
46
47
C-8629
C-8703
C-8805
Appendix
Description
Schedule of requirements for rubberised coir cushion
Schedule of requirements for plastic guide bush for axle
box guide of ICF/BG bogie (tentative)
Schedule and requirements for aluminum chequered sheets
for use as flooring material on coaching stock.
Fibre glass reinforced plastic in railway coaches
Technical specification for hot coiled helical springs used
on main line coaches and EMU stock.
Anti-pilferage measures for compartment, lavatory and
other coaching stock fittings.
Tentative schedule of requirements for sheet moulding
compound to be used for manufacture of FRP products for
passenger coaches.
Tentative schedule of requirements for FRP seat cum back
tests of Indian railway coaches.
Technical specification for hot coiled helical springs used
on maintenance coaches & EMU stock.
Tentative schedule of requirements for FRP wall protector
for bath room of coaching stock of IR (Sk. -83114)
Schedule of requirements for flexible PVC flooring for
passenger coaches (tentative)
Schedule of requirements for anaerobic adhesive for use on
coaching stock (tentative).
Hindi version of C-8517, anaerobic adhesive for use in
coaches.
STR for air brake equipment for coaching stock.
Roller bearing specification
Particular specification for BG (1676 mm) all metal
integral light weight self -generating Ist class air
conditioned coaches.
Particular specification for BG all metal light weight
coaches.
STR for nylon guide roller/wearing piece for retractable
footplate
Hindi version of C-8605, nylon guide roller/wear piece for
retractable foot plate.
STR for decorative thermosetting synthetic resin bonded
laminated sheets.
Note on cleaning media for us e in bearing cleaning plants.
Procedure for manual ARC welding of wear plates (IRS:
R-65-78)
Report of committee on reduction of weight of coaches.
Specification for shock absorber.
Instructions for inspection/maintenance of air brake
equipment on passenger coaches.
S.No.
RDSO No.
48
C-8812
49
C-8903
50
C-8906
51
C-8910
52
C-8914
53
54
C-9001
C-9005
55
C-9009
56
C-9011
57
58
59
C-9019
C-9101
C-9103
60
C-9105
61
62
C-9121
C-9123
63
C-9125
64
C-9202
65
C-9203
66
C-9206
67
68
C-9210
C-9212
69
C-9213
70
C-9303
Appendix
Description
Schedule of requirements for UIC type elastomer flange
connections for intercommunication between passenger
coaches.
Schedule of requirement for hot cases operated by liquefied
petroleum gas for installation in Rly. pantry cars.
Schedule of technical requirements for vestibule canvas
cloth to be used in passenger coaches.
Schedule of technical requirements for direct admission
valve.
Schedule of requirements for flexible load bearing
polyurethane foam to be used in berth and seats of
passenger coaches.
Procedure for laying PVC flooring in passenger coaches.
Water raising system and instruction for filling water for
air braked coaches
Description of water raising system to SK-86209 and
instructions for filling water for air braked coaches.
Quality assurance specification for 'L' type Ferrodo quality
89/24 composition brake blocks for passenger trains.
Schedule of technical requirement for water purifier.
Specification for electric train set.
Schedule of technical requirements for plastic sheets (filled
PVC) for use in interior roof ceiling of passenger coaches.
Schedule of technical requirements for FRP axle box front
covers for all coil ICF type bogies for passenger coaches
(BG)
Schedule of requirements for push cock (tentative)
Schedule of requirements for plast ic lavatory chute
(tentative).
Schedule of requirements for plastic packing ring
(tentative).
Technical specification for fabricated bogie frame/bolster
for coaching stock.
Schedule of requirements for plastic brake gear bushes for
passenger coaches (ACETAL)
Instructions for operation of air brake main line passenger
trains (BG)
Specification for pipes and joints for Air braked coaches
Guide for approval of manufacturers for supply of bolster
suspension hangers for main line coaches and EMU stock.
Guide for approval of manufactures for supply of screw
couplings for main line coaches and wagon stock.
Schedule of technical requirements for air brake system for
loco hauled main line passenger stock for operational speed
of 160 kmph (tentative).
S.No.
RDSO No.
Appendix
Description
71
C-9307
72
C-9309-U
73
74
C-9313-U
C-9314-U
75
C-9318-U
76
C-9319
77
C-9321
78
C-9322
79
C-9403
80
C-9406
81
C-9407
82
C-9408
83
C-9501
84
C-9502
85
C-9503
86
C-9505
87
C-9509
88
C-9511
89
C-9601
S.No.
RDSO No.
Appendix
Description
90
C-9602
91
C-9702
92
C-9703
93
C-9704
94
C-9705
95
C-9802
96
C-9803
97
C-9805
98
C-9807
99
C-9808
100
C-9809
101
C-9810
102
C-9901
103
C-9903
104
C-9904
105
C-9905
S.No.
RDSO No.
Appendix
Description
106
C-9906
107
C-9907
108
C-9908
109
C-9911
110
C-9912
111
C-K013
112
CMI 9801
113
CMI 9901
114
CMI-K003
115
G-92
116
G-97, Amnd.
Slip 2, July,
2001
117
M&C/PCN/
101/2001
118
02-ABR-94
119
R-64/98
(Revised)
STR for upper and lower rubber washers for mail line
coaches.
120
R-19/93
Wheels
121
IRS M-41
Appendix
APPENDIX E
This
has
been
separately
issued
as
CAMTECH/M/99/INFRA-WASHING LINE/1.1
CAMTECHs
document
no.
Appendix
APPENDIX F
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Sr. No.
Particulars
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Coach
Coach should be washed both from out side & inside.
Disinfect and spray insecticide at corner and crevices of
coaches after washing all coaches
Intensive cleaning of coach
Shell
Visually check body panels/end walls for damages
Visually inspect destination boards brackets.
Visually inspect window bars for damage/missing
Examine body side doors for working/ damages
Inspect door handles for damages/missing
Inspect vestibule and its Rubber fittings for
damages/missing, repair if necessary
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
Appendix
Sr. No.
Particulars
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
Appendix
Sr. No.
Particulars
4.0
Bogie
4.1
4.1.1
Bogie frame
Examine visually the condition of bogie side frame,
transom, longitudinals and all welded locations
Examine rubber stopper/stop screw of axle box crown for
damage/missing/loose
Inspect axle box safety straps/loops for
damage/broken/missing
Bolster safety straps/loops for damage/broken/missing
Brake hanger brackets for damages
Inspect safety brackets for brake hanger pins
Examine oil level in side bearer oil-bath and oil filling
cap, replenish oil if needed
Check visually BSS hanger brackets
Examine visually anchor link brackets
Examine condition of wearing piece and wearing plate
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.1.9
4.1.10
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
Appendix
Sr. No.
Particulars
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3a
4.2.3b
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
Primary suspension
Visually examine axle box springs for breakage
Visually examine dash pot oil filling special screw for
deficiency
Check oil leakages in dash pot through defective
seals/vent screws
Add specified grade of oil in dash pot
Visually examine axle box clearance
Check and attend axle guide assembly if necessary
Check axle box clearance with gauge
Secondary suspension
Visually examine bolster springs breakages/damages
Visually examine Bolster lower spring beam
Visually examine BSS hangers, hanger blocks, BSS pins
Check bolster clearance
Visually examine equalising stay rods and pins (small
and big)
Visually check anchor lin ks
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
Appendix
Sr. No.
Particulars
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9
4.3.10
4.3.11
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.4.6
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
Appendix
Sr. No.
Particulars
4.4.7
4.4.8
4.4.9
4.4.10
4.4.11
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
5.0
5.1
5.1.1
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
Appendix
Sr. No.
Particulars
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.7
5.1.8
5.1.9
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
Minimum 3
coaches
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
Appendix
Sr. No.
Particulars
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
minimum 3
coaches
Appendix
Sr. No.
Particulars
5.2.10
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
7.0
7.1a
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
Appendix
Sr. No.
Particulars
7.1b
7.2
7.3
7.4
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
Appendix
Sr. No.
Particulars
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6a
9.6b
9.7
10.0
10.1
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
Appendix
Sr. No.
Particulars
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
11.0
11.1
11.2
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
Appendix
Sr. No.
Particulars
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
12.0
12.1
12.2
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
Appendix
Sr. No.
Particulars
12.3
13.0
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
Appendix
Sr. No.
Particulars
14.0
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
Primary /
Secondary
examination
Primary /
Secondary
Maintenance
On rake
Schedule
B
1 month + 3
days
3 months + 7
days
6 months +
15 days
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
On rake at
nominated
primary depot
Sick line at
nominated
primary
depot
Appendix G
IOH FORMAT
COACH NUMBER
BASE STATION
TYPE
SERVICE
YEAR BUILT
MANUFACTURED BY
LAST POH
SCHEDULE-A
RETURN DATE
SCHEDULE-B
BOGIE DETAILS
ICV end
NICV end
Bogie No:
Year Built:
Manufactured By:
DATE OF IOH
DATE OF RELEASE
SSE/IOH
Appendix
BOGIE DETAILS
DESCRIPTION
Bogie frame condition
Bolster
Bolster suspension bracket
Lower spring seat
Axle guide
Axle guide cap/
modified/unmodified
Axle guide assembly
Guide bush
Packing rings rubber
Protective tubes
Equalizing stay
Anchor links
Bolster suspension hanger block
Bolster suspension hanger pin
Center pivot
Center pivot silent block
Side bearer
Side wearing piece
Side wearing plate
Side bearer oil cup
Vertical shock absorber
Axle box safety strap
Bolster safety strap
Brake beam safety slings/wire
ropes
Equalising stay safety bracket
ICV END
NICV END
Worn out/damaged/good/renewed
Worn out/good/renewed
Damaged/good/renewed
Cracked/good/renewed
Bent/corooded/good/renewed/13/16
tonnes
Damaged/good/renewed
Gauged/good/renewed
Gauged/good/renewed
Bolt loose/worn/good/renewed
Silent block damaged/renewed/good
Damaged/good
Gauged/good/worn out/renewed
Gauged/good/worn out/renewed
Leaking/good/oil topped up
Damaged/good/renewed
Missing/good/renewed
Missing /good/renewed
Missing/worn out/good/renewed
Worn out/damaged/good/renewed
Worn out/ good/renewed
Damaged/good/renewed
Cracked/good/renewed
Bent/corooded/good/renewed/13/16 tonnes
Missing/bent/good/renewed
Missing/bent/good/ renewed
Damaged/good/renewed
Gauged/good/renewed
Gauged/good/renewed
Bolt loose/worn/good/renewed
Silent block damaged/renewed/good
Damaged/good
Gauged/good/worn out/renewed
Gauged/good/worn out/renewed
Leaking/good/oil topped up
Damaged/good/renewed
Missing /good/renewed
Missing /good/renewed
Missing worn out/good/renewed
REMARKS
Appendix
DESCRIPTION
Brake beam
Brake head
Brake hanger
Brake blocks
Equalizing lever long
Equalizing lever short
Equalizing leve r hanger
Connecting rod
Actuating rod
Adjusting link
Hanger bracket bushes
Hanger bush
Brake head bushes
Collar bushes
Sleeve bushes
Equalizing lever bushes
Pin No: 1
Pin No: 2
Pin No: 3
Hand brake
REMARKS
Appendix
VACUUM BRAKE
VACUUM CYLINDER
Position Barrel
ICV
end
NICV
end
serrations
Good/worn
out/renewed
Piston head
serrations
Good/worn
out/renewed
Good/worn
out/renewed
Good/worn
out/renewed
Rolling ring
Neck ring
Joint ring
guide bush
Good/worn
out/renewed
Damaged/Good
/renewed
Damaged/Good
/renewed
Damaged/Good
/renewed
Balance vac.
Brake test
Done/ Not
done
Good/worn
out/renewed
Damaged/Good
/renewed
Damaged/Good
/renewed
Damaged/Good
/renewed
Done / Not
done
DA VALVES
Position
O.Ring
K.Ring
Diaphragm
ICV end
Good /
Renewed
Good /
Renewed
Good /
Renewed
Good /
Renewed
Good / Renewed
Air admission
valve
Good / Renewed
Good / Renewed
Good / Renewed
NICV end
Non return
valve
Good /
Renewed
Good /
Renewed
Filter
Body
Bench testing
Cleaned /
Renewed
Cleaned /
Renewed
Damaged /
Renewed
Damaged /
Renewed
Done / Not
done
Done / Not
done
RELEASE VALVE
Position
ICV end
NICV end
R/Valve
diaphragm
Good / Reused /
Renewed
Good / Reused /
Renewed
Seating washer
Good / Reused /
Renewed
Good / Reused /
Renewed
Good / Reused /
Renewed
Good / Reused /
Renewed
Triangular washer
Vacuum testing
Good / Reused /
Renewed
Good / Reused /
Renewed
Appendix
IC VALVE
BRAKE FITTINGS
SAB
Hose pipes & clips
Siphon Pipes & clips
Vacuum reservoir
Train pipes
Van Valves
SAB antivibration bracket
Spring
Lid
Washer
Step screw
Bronze bush
Good / Renewed
ICV END
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Missing / good / defect ive / renewed
NICV END
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Missing / good / defective / renewed
END
Angle cocks
Isolating cocks
Dirt collectors
P.E.A.V.
P.E.A.S.D.
Guard emergency valve
Drain cocks
Brake cylinders
Bogie mounted brake cylinder
Flexible hoses of BMBC
Air reservoir
Distributor valves
Hose B.P. with palm end
Hose F.P. with palm end
Train pipes B.P. & F.P.
ICV END
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
NICV END
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Defective / good / Renewed / tested
Appendix
ICV END
Examined / good / renewed
Examined / good / renewed
Examined / good / renewed
Examined / good / renewed
Missing / good / renewed
Damaged / corroded / good
Examined / good / renewed
Damaged / missing / good / renewed
Examined / good / renewed
Worn out / good / renewed
NICV END
Examined / good / renewed
Examined / good / renewed
Examined / good / renewed
Examined / good / renewed
Missing / good / renewed
Damaged / good
Examined / good / renewed
Damaged / missing / good / renewed
Examined / good / renewed
Worn out / good / renewed
UNDER FRAME
Head stock
Trough floor
Sole bar
Cross members
Diagonals
Main transom
Inner headstock
Train pipe and joints
Dummy carrier & dummy plug
Appendix
Diameter
Wheel distance
Axle number
Tyre profile
L-1/R-1
L-2/R-2
L-3/R-3
L-4/R-4
Tyre turned /
not turned
Wheel dia
Wheel
distance
Axle
number
UST number
Axle pulley
condition
If shop wheel, SL
number
L-1/R-1
L-2/R-2
L-3/R-3
L-4/R-4
L1
R1
L2
R2
L3
R3
L4
R4
Appendix
DIMENSION ON ARRIVAL
Description
L-1
R-1
L-2
R-2
L-1
R-1
L-2
R-2
Buffer height
A dimension
B dimension
Table height
DIMENSION - AFTER IOH
Description
Buffer height
A dimension
B dimension
Table height
1
Broken / good
Broken / good
2
Broken / good
Broken / good
3
Broken / good
Broken / good
4
Broken / good
Broken / good
5
Broken / good
Broken / good
6
Broken / good
Broken / good
7
Broken / good
Broken / good
8
Broken / good
Broken / good
Right
Appendix
Bolster springs
Left
Right
1
Broken / good
Broken / good
2
Broken / good
Broken / good
Right
3
Broken / good
Broken / good
4
Broken / good
Broken / good
Appendix
AMENITY FITTINGS
Items
Mirrors
Mirror shelves
Commodes
Squatting pans
Commode seat & lid
Commode chute
Push cocks
Flushing valves
Turn over latches
Tower bolts
Shower rose
Coat hooks
Glass shutters
Louver shutters
Banjo shutter
Safety latches
Window bars
Main door handles & latches
Berths / back rest / seats
Cushions
Rexene
Vestibules-UIC / conventional
Vestibule fall plates
Vestibule Door locking / latches
Condition of exterior paint
Condition of interior painting
End body & roof painting
Emergency exit window
Remarks
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Missing / damaged / good / renewed
Good / Shabby / Washed / Repainted
Good / Shabby / Washed / Repainted
Good / Shabby / Washed / Repainted
Not available/Available/Good
Appendix
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Check
Leakage rate
a) Brake pipe
b) Feed pipe
a) Brake cylinder filling time (from 0 to 3.6 kg/cm2 )
b) Maximum Brake cylinder pressure
Brake cylinder release time (3.8 to 0.4 Kg/cm2 )
Sensitivity & Insensitivity
a) Brake application when brake pressure is reduced at the rate of 0.6
Kg/cm2 in 6 seconds
b) Brake application when brake pressure is reduced at the rate of 0.3
Kg/cm2 in 60 seconds
Emergency brake application and release
a) Maximum brake cylinder pressure
b) Manual release of brake cylinder after emergency application
Graduated application and release
a) Application
b) Leakage in Brake cylinder pressure in 5 minutes after emergency
application
c) Release
7.
Piston stroke
BP PRESSURE:
FP PRESSURE:
Specified
0.2 Kg/cm2 per minute (max.)
0.2 Kg/cm2 per minute (max.)
3 to 5 seconds
3.8 + 0.1 Kg/cm2
15 to 20 seconds
Brake should apply
Brake should not apply
3.8 + 0.1Kg/cm2
Brake cylinder should get fully released
Brake pipe pressure decreases in steps and Brake
cylinder pressure builds up in steps
0.1 Kg/cm2 within 5 minutes
Brake pipe pressure increases in steps and Brake
cylinder pressure reduces in steps
90+10mm
Actual
S.No.
8.
Appendix
Check
Specified
b) Reset PEASD
9.
10.
Dirt collector
compartment
Actual
Index
INDEX
AIR BRAKES
Air Brake Hoses
Air Brake Sub Assemblies
Air Brake System
Brake Pipe & Feed Pipe Hoses of Air Brake
Classification of Air Brake System
Principle of Operation of Twin Pipe Graduated Release Air Brake System
4-2
4-2
4-1
4-2
4-1
4-1
ALARM
Passenger Emergency Alarm Signal Device
Passenger Emergency Alarm System
Passenger Emergency Alarm Valve (PEAV)
Test Bench Schematic for Testing PEAV and PEASD
Test Procedures for PEAV
Testing of Passenger Emergency Alarm Signal Device
4-31
4-31
4-33
4-32
4-35
4-31
ALARM CHAIN
Alarm Chain Apparatus
Alarm Chain Apparatus Test
5-4
5-4
AMENITY FITTINGS
Amenity Fittings for Coaching Stock
Safety Requirements of Schedule of Passenger Amenity Fittings for BG Coaches
Schedule of Passenger Amenity Fittings for BG Coaches
11-1
11-5
11-1
ANCHOR LINK
Anchor Link
Anchor Link with Silent Block
3-3, 24
3-8
AUXILIARY RESERVOIR
Auxiliary Reservoir
Charging Time of Auxiliary Reservoir and Control Reservoir
Testing of Auxiliary Reservoir
4-12
4-23
4-13
AXLE
Axle
Dimensional Checks of Machined Axles
Inspection of Axle
Inspection of Axle Journals/ Ultrasonic Testing of the Axle
Inspection of Machined Axles
Machining of New Axles
Pressing off a Rejected Axle from a Wheel
Surface Finish Checks of Machined Axle
Ultrasonic Testing of Axles
Wheel and Axle
10-1
10-6
10-4
10-7
10-6
10-6
10-6
10-6
10-21
10-1
Index
AXLE BOX
Axle Box Assembly
Axle Boxes with Roller Bearings
Dismounting of Axle Boxes & Roller Bearings
Lubrication of Axle Box
10-8
10-3
10-7
10-12
3-26
3-1
3-4
3-5
3-36
3-2
BOGIE
All-Coil ICF Bogie
Attention to Bogie Frame
Bogie
Bogie Assembly
Bogie Frame
Bogie Lowering Work Station
Dimensional Check Report for AC & Power Car Bogie Frame
Dimensional Check Report For Non AC Bogie Frame
Maintenance of Bogies (Flow Diagram)
ICF Bogie
Workshop Maintenance- Bogie Shop
3-1
3-18
3-1
3-1, 29
3-34
3-29
3-19
3-21
3-15
3-2
3-15
BOGIE BOLSTER
Attention to Bogie Bolster Arrangement
Bogie Bolster Suspension
3-23
3-2
3-28
6-4
6-11
3-13
6-1
6-5
6-5
3-13
6-5
6-14
6-12
6-3
Index
BOLSTER
Bolster Assembly Work Station
Bolster Spring Suspension Hangers (BSS Hangers)
Repairs to Body Bolster
3-29
3-15
2-8
BRAKE BLOCK
Asbestos Based K Type Composition Brake Block
Characteristics of Composition Brake Blocks
Composite Brake Block
Geometrical Characteristics of the Brake Blocks
Mechanical and Physical Characteristics of Brake Block
Non-Asbestos K Type Composition Brake Block
BRAKE CYLINDERS
Assembly of Brake Cylinder
Brake Cylinder
Brake Cylinder Piston Stroke
Brake Cylinder Test Bench
Brake Cylinder with Slack Adjuster 203.2 mm x 95.25 mm (8" x 3 3/4")
Detail of 203 mm Air Brake Cylinder (with Slack Adjuster)
Dismantling of Brake Cylinder
Overhauling of Brake Cylinder
POH Kit for Brake Cylinder 14
Test Bench for Brake Cylinder
Test Layout for Brake Cylinder with Built in Slack Adjuster
Testing of Brake Cylinder
6-3
6-1
6-1
6-3
6-3
6-2
4-7
4-5, 6
1-28
4-7
6-2
6-5
4-6
4-6
4-42
4-8
6-13
4-7
BRAKE GEAR
Brake Gear and Axle Guide Assembly Work Station
3-29
BRAKE POWER
Brake Power Certificate
1-34
BRAKE RIGGING
Bogie Mounted Brake Rigging
Brake Rigging
Brake Rigging of conventional Air Brake Power Car
Brake Rigging of conventional Air Brake Non AC Coaches
Brake Rigging of conventional Air Brake Self Generating AC Coaches
Coach Under Frame Mounted Brake Rigging
Coach Underframe Brake Rigging
3-12
3-8, 35
3-10
3-10
3-10
3-8
3-8
BRAKE SYSTEM
Assembling Brake System on Coach
Brake System Maintenance
Charging the Brake System
5-10
1-27,29,30, 31
4-1
Index
BRAKES
Adjustment of Brakes
Brake Shaft
Brake Shaft Brackets
Brake Van Equipment
Hand Brake Attachment
Hook for Brake Release
5-10
5-3
5-4
1-23
6-11
1-16
BUFFER
Assembly of Buffer
Buffer Casing
Buffer Height
Buffer Height Adjustment
Buffer Height Adjustment - ICF Coach
Buffer Plunger
Buffer Spindle
ICF Type Buffer of BG Mainline Coaches
Mounting of Buffer on Coach
Rubber Buffer Pads
9-7
9-6
1-5
1-5
3-31
9-6
9-7
9-5
9-7
9-6
CENTRE PIVOT
Repairs to Centre Pivots
2-8
CHECK VALVE
Check Valve
Check Valve with Choke
Test Bench for Check Valve
Testing of Check Valve with Choke
4-36
4-36
4-11
4-37
CLEANING
Cleaning of Toilet
External Cleaning / Washing
Internal Cleaning of GS, SLR
Internal Cleaning of Upper Class AC and Sleeper Coaches
Platform Cleaning and Washing
Washing and Cleaning of Coaches
1-20
1-20
1-21
1-20
1-19
1-19
COACH
Coach
Coach Design Related Requirements
Coach Failure Report
Coach Maintenance History Card
Coach Shell
Coaches with Attendants
Codal Life of Coaches
Conditions Required for Maintenance of 24 Coach Trains
Deficiency Rolling Stock (DRS) for Coaching Stock
Detachment a Coach
End Construction of Broad Gauge all Metal Light Weight Coach ICF
1-1
1-21
1-38
1-26
2-1
1-25
1-1
1-21
1-23
1-30
2-3
Index
11-6
1-2
1-2
3-32
12-4
1-17
Appendix C
Appendix B
1-33
1-3
1-2
1-21
1-22
1-27
1-37
1-24
1-7
1-6
1-12
1-9
1-10
1-13
Appendix A
1-8
4-3
DA VALVE
List of Items to be Changed in Escort type DA valve on Condition Basis
D.A.Valve (Escort- Knorr D.A. Valve)
5-8
5-8
DESTINATION BOARDS
1-23
DESTRUCTION TUBE
9-7
DIRT COLLECTOR
Components of Dirt Collector
Dirt Collector
POH Kit for 2 Way Dirt Collector
Salient Features of Dirt Collector
Sectional View of Dirt Collector
Test Bench for Dirt Collector
4-10
4-9
4-42
4-9
4-10
4-11
DISCS
Boring (Machining) of New Discs
Inspection of Re-Bored Wheel Disc
Inspection of Wheel Disc as per CMI-K003
Machining of Serviceable Wheel Disc
Pressing off Rejected Discs from a Wheel
Pressing on Wheel Discs on Axle
10-7
10-6
10-3
10-6
10-7
10-6
Index
10-2
10-4
DISTRIBUTOR VALVE
C3W Distributor Valve
Charging Stage of KE Distributor Valve
CR Check Valve Reset Test of Distributor Valve
CR Over Charge Reduction Test of Distributor Valve
Distributor Valve
Emergency Application Test of Distributor Valve
Full Service Application and Release Test of Distributor Valve
Function of Distributor Valve
Graduated Application of KE Distributor Valve
Graduated Application Test of Distributor Valve
Graduated Release Test of Distributor Valve
Insensitivity Test of Distributor Valve
KE Distributor Valve
Operation of C3W Distributor Valve
Operation of KE Distributor Valve
Overcharge Protection Test of Distributor Valve
POH Kit for C3W Distributor Valve
POH Kit for KPISL Distributor Valve
Pressure Tightness Test for Distributor Valve
Proforma for C3W/KE Distributor Valve
Quick Service Test of Distributor Valve
Sensitivity Test of Distributor Valve
Test Rack for C3W Distributor Valve
Testing of Distributor Valve
Testing of KE Type Distributor Valve
Tools and Fixture for Overhauling of C3W Distributor Valve
Twin Pipe Operation of Distributor Valve
4-19
4-26
4-25
4-24
4-19
4-24
4-23
4-19
4-28
4-25
4-25
4-24
4-26
4-19
4-26
4-24
4-40
4-41
4-23
4-29
4-24
4-24
4-23
4-22
4-29
4-22
4-25
DOORS
Body Side Doors
Corridor Inter Communication Doors of Air Conditioned Coaches
Doors
Repairs to Door Handles
Repairs to Door Pivots
Sliding Doors
Sliding Doors of Luggage Vans
Sliding Doors of Upper Class Compartments
Sole Bar and Pillars at Door Corners
Stiffening of Sole Bar at Doorways
Vestibule Doors
11-14
11-16
11-14
2-8
2-8
11-15
11-15
11-15
2-4
2-6
11-16
DRAFT KEY
9-3
DRAFT YOKE
9-3
9-3
Index
DRAW BAR
9-1
2-8
9-2
DRAW GEAR
Draw Gear Maintenance
Draw Gear Pin
Enhanced Draw Gear & Screw Couplings
Inspection & Maintenance in POH of Draw Gear
Re-Fitment of Draw Gear on Coach
9-2
9-4
9-1
9-1
9-4
DRAW HOOK
Draw Hook
Draw Hook Beam
9-2
9-4
EQUALISING STAY
Equalising Stay (Schematic View)
Equalising Stay Rod and Pins (Small & Big)
Equalising Stays
3-16
3-25
3-15
EXAMINATION
Enroute/Terminating Examination of Passenger Trains
Examination and Repair Practice of Interior Fittings in Carriage Maintenance Depot
Examination and Repair Practice of Wheel and Axle in Carriage Maintenance Depot
Examination of Originating Trains
Examination of Trains
Round Trip Examination
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1-15
11-7
10-18
1-15
1-15
4-38
1-23
FLOOR
Attachment and Fixing of Floor
Floor
Flooring Arrangement in a Coach
Grooving of Floor
Lavatory Flooring
Laying of PVC Flooring
Laying Procedure for Sub-Flooring
Material Description of Floor
PVC Flooring of Floor
Repairs to Floor Channel
Thermo-Welding (Hot Air Welding) of Floor
Trimming of Floor
Trough Floor
Welding of Floor
11-10
11-9
11-9
11-11
11-12
11-10
11-10
11-9
11-12
2-8
11-10
11-12
2-5,6
11-11
Index
4-13
4-11
4-14
HANGER BLOCK
Hanger and Hanger Blocks
Hanger Block (Stone)
3-17
3-26
HEAD STOCK
Corrosion Repair of Head Stock
Head Stock
2-7
2-5, 6
HOSE COUPLING
Test bench for hose coupling
Testing Procedure of Hose Coupling
4-3
4-3
ISOLATING COCK
Isolating Cock
POH Kit for Isolating Cock
Test Bench for Isolating Cock
4-37
4-42
4-11
PAINTING
Exterior Colour Scheme
Interior Painting
Paint Schedule `A'
Paint Schedule `C'
Painting
Painting of Parts
Tools and Plants for Painting
Types of Brushes for Painting
12-2, 3
12-4
12-1, 6
12-4, 6
12-1
12-4
12-5
12-5
ROLLER BEARING
Construction Feature of Roller Bearings
Direct Mounted Roller Bearing Arrangement
Dismounting of Roller Bearing
Examination and Repair Practice of Roller Bearing Axle Boxes in Carriage Maintenance
Depot
Inspection of other Roller Bearing Components
Inspection of Roller Bearings in Mounted Position
List of Tool and Plants for Roller Bearing Maintenance
Mounting of Spherical Roller Bearing
Mounting of Spherical Roller Bearings and Axle Box Components
Oil Bath Method For Mounting of Roller Bearing
Periodicity of inspection of Roller Bearing
Precautions for maintenance of Roller Bearing
Roller Bearing Defects and Remedial Measures
Roller Bearing Maintenance in Shop
Roller Bearings
10-8
10-10
10-14
10-20
10-12
10-11
10-10
10-16
10-15
10-16
10-8
10-17
10-17
10-8
10-8
Index
10-3
10-9
Roof
Roof Repairs
Roof Testing
TRA Type Roof Ventilators Repairs
2-6
2-6
2-8
2-8
ROOF
11-13
11-13
11-14
SHELL
Description of Shell
Shell
Shell for ICF Coaches
SHOCK ABSORBERS
2-1
2-1
2-1
3-15, 32
SLACK ADJUSTER
'A' & 'E' Dimension for Slack Adjuster
Adjustments of Slack Adjuster
Dimension `e' of Slack adjuster
End Piece for Slack Adjuster Pull Rod
Overhauling of Slack Adjuster
Slack Adjuster
Slack Adjuster (SAB DRV2-450)
Slack Adjuster Support Bracket on Coach
Test Rack for Slack Adjuster
Testing of Slack Adjuster
SOLE BAR
Corrosion Repair of Sole Bar
Sole Bar
Sole Bar, Body Pillar and Turn Under at Lavatory Area
Sole Bar, Turn Under And Body Pillars at Locations other than those described above
Sole Bar, Turn Under and Pillars Above the Lifting Pads
1-28
5-10
5-10
5-9
4-15
4-15
5-8
5-4
4-17
4-16
2-6
2-6
2-4
2-4
2-4
SPRINGS
Coil Springs
Drawing Code of Springs For ICF BG Coaches
Load Deflection Testing And Grouping of Axle Box Spring (B.G Main Line Coaches)
Springs
CORROSION REPAIRS TO UNDERFRAME MEMBERS
3-26
3-27
3-27, 28
3-3
2-5
Index
5-2
5-1
5-5
5-10
5-12
5-6
1-28, 29, 30, 31, 5-1
VACUUM CYLINDER
Assembling and Testing of Vacuum Cylinder
Vacuum Cylinder Trunnion Bracket
5-8
5-3
VESTIBULE
Conversion to UIC Type Vestibule
UIC Type Rubber Vestibule and Foot Plate Arrangement
Vestibule
11-16
11-16
11-16
WHEEL SET
Category of Wheels
Components of a Wheel Set
Intermediate Worn Wheel Profile for Coaching Stock
Normal Repair of Wheel Sets
Machining of Wheel Seats for Matching of Wheel Disc Bores
Machining of Wheel Seats on an old Axle for Matching of Wheel Disc Bores
Measurement of a Wheel Gauge
Measurement of Wheel Diameter
Pre-Inspection of Wheels in the Workshop
Pressing on Wheel on Axle
RA (Replacement of Axles) Wheels
Rd (Replacement of Solid Discs) Wheels
Repair Procedures for Different Categories of Wheels
Wheel Disc Solid
Wheel Distance Gauge
Wheels Requiring Replacement of an Axle (RA Wheels)
10-4
10-1
10-5
10-4
10-6
10-7
10-3
10-3
10-3
10-7
10-6
10-7
10-4
10-1, 3
10-9
10-4
WINDOWS
AC Windows of RCF Coaches
AC Windows of ICF Coaches
Emergency Openable Windows
Lavatory Windows
Lavatory Windows of AC Coaches
Maintenance of AC Windows in Workshops
Maintenance of Windows of Non AC Coaches
Windows
Windows of Non AC Coaches
11-7
11-7
11-7
11-7
11-8
11-8
11-8
11-7
11-7
SIDE BEARERS
Side Bearer Arrangement
Side Bearers
3-7
3-2
*****
(Govt. of India)
(Ministry of Railways)
IRCAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/cs-1to cs-10/2014
2014
Centre
for
Advanced
Maintenance
TECHnology
Excellence in Maintenance
MAHARAJPUR, GWALIOR--474020
(Govt. of India)
(Ministry of Railways)
IRCAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS-01(07/2006)
July 2006
Centre
for
Advanced
Maintenance
TECHnology
Excellence in Maintenance
MAHARAJPUR, GWALIOR--474020
Maintenance manual for B.G. coaches of ICF design ( Ist Correction slip )
The Ist correction slip for Maintenance Manual for B.G. Coaches of ICF design is being
issued. The corrections/modifications are based on the following:-
1.
Report of the Manual Review Committee for Coach Manual March -05
(Approved by Railway Board vide letter No. 2001/M(safety)/7/6/RSRC/Pt II
Dt: 06.09.2005
2.
3.
4.
Kundan Kumar
Director (Mech)/CAMTECH
Kundan Kumar
Director (Mech)/CAMTECH
" "~"
'.f):ii
"
. .:'
,,
;~:;.~
"
'
~.
. , "~~j';,,
">;:-~ ~il4f~;'
'"
"
,'.
?~~7::~~' ~~~.:;'c'i~~!Ii~~
-,;
'.
I--
..
...;.
.
.,
.'~o.'
.'"
~
-I
~MN~U~~:.
Dt. 07 -08-06
,--
A~~
A-bt-,M,~()
=r'- ~r.
)z\~J.
~\.
.
~
e;~'-~
...
Based 011 the repon of the manual review colnmiul:e and its appro\a: by
Railway Board vide letter no. 2001/M(safety)7/6/RSRC/Pt.-H
dated 6-9-05, the first
I
I
1
',;
-. ,
.~
",=
~"""
!'\
.'"
,~~
. I.
~~~
ED/CAMTECH
CO\:>'j'
E.b
\<Iy
1'1 t
Co c,c """--"5
elL
bo<".'\J....
RfMPj
..'"
"'bit
*
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01(07.2006)
1.
3.
4.
CAMTECH
MANUAL
REF.
EXISTING
INSTUCTIONS
MODIFIED/CORRECTED
INSTRUCTIONS
Ch 1 Pg 1
2 lakhs kms
2.5 lakhs kms
Para 103
(Hindi)
Ch 1 Pg 2
Brake pull rod from Brake pull rod from bogie
Para 105 b (iii) bogie brake rigging
brake rigging in case of under
frame mounted cylinder AB
system
Ch 1 Pg 5
minimum shop issue
minimum shop issue size of
Para 106 (d)
size of solid wheel is
solid wheel is 837 mm
Note (i)
836 mm
Ch 1 Pg 5
REMARKS
In English version
is 2.5 lakhs kms
To add
(1) Ch 10 Pg 3
Table 10.1 is
also modified
(2) RB L no.
92/M
( c)/137/2
(part iii )
Dt: 03.03
Crown
Clearance
mm
45 3
GS, SCN,
WCB, WGSRJ,
WGSCZJ
SLR, SDC
48 3
WFAC,
25 3
WACCW,
WCBAC
WACCN
34 3
WGFAC,
36 3
WGACCW,
WGACCN,
WGSCZAC,
WGFSCZAC,
WGFACCW,
WGSCZACJ
5.
Ch 1 Pg 13
Table No. 1.6
column 1
Type of coaches
AC/GS/SOC/SCN
Printing error
Page 1 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01(07.2006)
Sr.
No
6.
CAMTECH
MANUAL REF.
EXISTING
INSTUCTIONS
MODIFIED/CORRECTED
INSTRUCTIONS
Ch 1 Pg 16
Fig 1.6
Ch 1 Pg 17
Table no.1.8
Sr no. 3 (a)
Column no. 4
Ch 1 Pg 18
Sr no. 4
Column no.4
7 days
4 days
9.
Ch 1 Pg 18
Sr no. 4
Column no.8
Last column is
blank
10.
Ch 1 Pg 20
Para no. 109 d
(ix)
Ch 1 Pg 21
Para no. 110 b
(ii)
In AC Coaches
Ch 1 Pg 22
Para no. 111a
(vi)
Ch 1 Pg 27
table no. 1.9
Sr. no. 5
7.
8.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Ch 1 Pg 29
Table no 1.10
row no 2
column no 3
Ch 1 Pg 31
Para no 115 b
Sub Para 3 (iii)
Only enhanced
capacity draw gear
and screw coupling
to RDSO sketch
No. 79061 and
79067 are to be
provided on the
rake
At primary end
REMARKS
Ref:
WR/Drg.C/SK
Ref: RPC 4 RB
letter No.
95/MC/141/1 Dt.
29.10.01
Ref: RPC 4 RB
letter No.
95/MC/141/1 Dt.
29.10.01
Ref:- RPC- 4
This correction is
as per para 901
(a) (i) Ch 9 page
1
RDSO specn.
C- 8703 Rev. 1
para 8.1
Max - 32 mm
(For BMBC)
Other assembly
maintenance
Painting of
lavatories from
inside
Deleted
Page 2 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01(07.2006)
Sr.
No
CAMTECH
MANUAL REF.
EXISTING
INSTUCTIONS
MODIFIED/CORRECTED
INSTRUCTIONS
16.
Ch 1 Pg 35
9 A (i)
Total
no
brake/Vac/
Cylinder
17.
Ch 1 Pg 35
9 A (i)
18.
Ch 1 Pg 37
Annexure 1.2
column 3
Ch 2 Pg 5
Para no 202 d
(vi) sub Para 3
Ch 3 Pg 9
table no. 3.3
Sr no 7 & 10
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Ch 3 Pg 9
Table no. 3.4
Sr. no. 11& 12
Ch 3 Pg 9
Table no.3.3 &
3.4
Ch 3 Pg 12
Table no.3.5 &
3.6
Ch 3 Pg 12
Table no. 3.5
Ch 3 Pg 12
Table No. 3.5
Sr. no. 11
Ch 3 Pg 12
Table No. 3.6
Sr. no. 16
Ch 3 Pg 16
Fig. No. 3.13
Ch 3 Pg 17
Fig no 3.14
Column 1 Row
no 4
REMARKS
Printing error
Printing error
magnesium oxy
chloride or
Deleted.
HIG AC3-3-2-302
(Sr. no. 7)
T3-2-048
( Sr. no. 10)
T3-2-048
T3-2-048
WTAC3-3-2-302
(Sr. no. 7)
T3-2-648
( Sr. no. 10)
T3-2-648
T3-2-648
Quantity of bogie
components shown
per bogie
Quantity of bogie
components shown
per bogie
Quantity of Long
lever mentioned as
8 Nos. per coach
ICF/ISD 3 -2-003
WFT AC3/3-2-307
WTAC3 -3-2-302
ICF/STD 3-2-003
Revised as per
latest drg.
38
Page 3 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01(07.2006)
Sr.
No
29.
CAMTECH
MANUAL REF.
EXISTING
INSTUCTIONS
MODIFIED/CORRECTED
INSTRUCTIONS
Ch 3 Pg 18
Table no 3.7
Row 9 Column
2&3
Ch 3 Pg 24
Para 316 e (ii)
8701.0 mm
31.
Ch 3 Pg 26
Para 316 I (i)
2B electrodes
32.
Ch 3 Pg 26
Para 317 (iii)
2 minutes
minutes
33.
Ch 3 Pg 26
Para 317 (vi)
deleted
34.
Ch 3 Pg 28
Para 317 v & vi
Ch 3 Pg 29
Para 319 c (i)
Printing error
30.
35.
----------
8761.0 mm
REMARKS
Ref: RDSO
M&C/W/V Dt.
24.05.04
Ref: RDSO tech
pamphlet C 8419
Rev. 1 para 3.2
To be deleted As
for manufacturer
only
36.
Ch 4 Pg 9
Para 409 i (iv)
Sub Para 6
37.
Ch 4 Pg 33
Fig 4.20
38.
Ch 4 Pg 33
Para 420
BP pressure to
exhaust through the
4 mm choke in the
PEAV.
RDSO instruction
March 2003 10th
CMG, item A3
Page 4 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01(07.2006)
Sr.
No
CAMTECH
MANUAL REF.
EXISTING
INSTUCTIONS
MODIFIED/CORRECTED
INSTRUCTIONS
39.
Ch 4 Pg 47
Annexure 4.4
Para 5 Sr. no. 7
80 to 130 mm
8510 mm
40.
Ch 5 Pg 4
Para 503j (ii)
6.4 Kgs
7.0 Kgs
41.
Ch 9 Pg 4
Table no. 9.6
Row 2 Column
3
12 mm
6 mm
42.
Ch 9 Pg 4
Table no. 9.7
row no. 6
column 4
49 mm flat
43.
Ch 9 Pg 5
Para 901
Sub Para 4
Ch 9 Pg 5
Table no 9.8
row 5
column 2
196 mm length of
pack
44.
REMARKS
Brake cylinder
piston stroke
8510 mm is
correct. As per
RDSO letter Jan
05 brake rigging
ratio modified to
1.13.1 piston
stroke for
modified ratio is
6010 mm
2. Appendix G
Sr. no. 7 also
modified
IRCA rule
2.12.1.6. para 26
C 4 (e) page no.
104
Ref:- Drg: no T2-1-602,
thickness of new
wearing piece is
12 mm and
permissible wear
is 6 mm
Since trunnion
and bent link
cannot be
dismantled during
POH 2 mm
chrome plated
wire is suggested
RDSO CMI
9901(Rev. 1)
Also corrected the
Appendix C Sr
.no. 62
Page 5 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01(07.2006)
Sr.
No
CAMTECH
MANUAL REF.
EXISTING
INSTUCTIONS
MODIFIED/CORRECTED
INSTRUCTIONS
45.
Ch 9 Pg 7
Projection of buffer
Para 902 b (viii) from head should
be 600 to 635 mm
46.
Ch 10 Pg. 10
Fig 10.4
Note no. 1.
47.
Ch 11 Pg 1 to 5
Table 11.1 &
11.2
(Both Hindi &
English)
Ch 11 Pg 13
Para 1106 a
row 2
column 3
Appendix (A to
D)
48.
49.
-----------
Foam rubber
cushion to IS:
1741/60 Gr. B
----------
REMARKS
Projection of
buffer may be
checked in terms
of buffer stroke
length instead of
overall length of
buffer assembly.
Further the stroke
length 127+0/-5
given in RDSO
Drg: no. SK
98145 is for new
assembly. Hence
for POH suitable
buffer stroke
length may be
mentioned instead
of maintaining
overall length of
600 to 635 mm.
Max. operating
speed was
missing.
Page 6 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01(07.2006)
Sr.
No
CAMTECH
MANUAL REF.
50.
Appendix G
Sr. No. 7
51.
New Addition
(i) Repair of
water
tanks
(ii) Depot
facilities
required in
coaching
depots
EXISTING
INSTUCTIONS
MODIFIED/CORRECTED
INSTRUCTIONS
REMARKS
Brake cylinder
piston stroke
8510 mm is
correct. As per
RDSO letter Jan
05 brake rigging
ratio modified to
1.13.1 piston
stroke for
modified ratio is
6010 mm
(i) Annexure I
(ii) Annexure - IV
Page 7 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Annexure-I
Write up on repairs of water tanks. This may be added to CAMTECH manual
Overhead tanks
1. All overhead tanks should be removed in every third POH for testing and repairs. The
inspection joint should be opened, the tanks de-scaled, thoroughly cleaned and all rubber
and flexible pipes renewed. The tank and joints should be given pressure test at 0.35
Kg/cm2gauge pressure. Corroded and bulged panels should be cut out and replaced. If this is
not workable, the tank should be condemned and replaced. After the hydraulic test, the
inside of the tank should be painted with bituminous black lead-free acid, alkali, water and
heat resistant paint, free from CNSL and BNSL, to IS 158/1968 Type 2 and properly dried
before fitment.
2. During other POH, panels under the tanks and the top panels of the partition should be
removed for inspection of tanks, joints and holding bolts in position. Tanks should be filled
with water and all joints checked for leaks. The holding bolts of the roof tanks should be
checked for tightness and corrosion. Bolts with worn out, damaged or corroded threads
should be replaced. The flexible hose couplings between the water pipes and the tanks
should be replaced in every POH.
3. The tank foundation frames should be painted with anti-corrosive paint after cleaning it free
of dust and corrosion.
4. The repaired tanks should then be fitted back in position using new holding bolts and nuts,
which should be galvanized before use.
5. All distorted, deficient or broken covers of roof and side water filling caps should be
replaced. Wherever not available, side water filling arrangement should be provided. The
tank should be flushed and all loose scales, dirt, etc cleaned before plumbing work in taken
in hand.
Page 8 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Annexure-II
785
NA
NA
NA
NA
2010 1833
NA
1800
NA
550
550
3) Hip width 610
for passenger
4) Height clearance for seat / berth
450
610
490
415
504
450
3Tier
sleeper
607 T
495 L
2Tier
sleeper
592
NA
618
Long
610
Trans
618
Long
610
Trans
First
class
General
785
Day
coach
680
Sleeper
First
class
Description
340
305
--
340
340
340
340
--
420
420
405
405
420
405
405
405
957
675
NA
900
675
NA
900
NA
Page 9 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
3Tier
sleeper
Chair car
First
class
Sleeper
Day
coach
General
Double
Decker
5) Corridor
width
2Tier
sleeper
Description
700
590
600
435
700
590
550
565
570
1896
1836
NA
2312 1800
1702 1702
157
5
NA
1500 -
NA
1020 NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
I. Four berther
710
540
540
NA
710
554
518
488
535
II. Coupe
710
NA
NA
710
1.56
1.1
1.1
1.6
1.1
1.4
1.5
1.59
12
16
18
09
18
27
23
36
23
32
36
18
36
36
30
72
6) Bay width
8) Lavatory
I. In side area in 1.6
Sq. metre
II. Max. No. of 6
passengers per
lavatory
9) Body side door
I. Max. No. of 12
passengers per
door a side
Page 10 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
First
class
Sleeper
Day
coach
General
Double
Decker
i) Minimum lux
at
horizontal
plane 840 mm
above
floor
level
a) Compartment 40
40
40
40
40
30
30
30
30
b) Lavatory
16
16
16
16
16
11
11
11
11
c) Corridor
16
16
16
16
16
11
11
11
11
ii)
Individual Yes
switches
for
ceiling light
iii)
Berth Yes
reading
light
with switches
iv) Night light
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
v)
Individual
switch for night
light
vi)
Toilet
engage light
vii)
Toilet
engage sign
viii) Socket out
let 110V
ix) Call bell
push button
x) Plug point &
switch for 110V
for Lap top &
mobile
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
First
class
Chair car
3Tier
sleeper
Description
Page 11 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Double
Decker
Day
coach
General
sleeper
Chair car
One
for
two
berths
One
per
lav.
400
300 mm 300
mm
(F)
mm (F)
(S)
200
200 mm 200
mm
(F)
mm (F)
(F)
c) Regulator for Yes
No
No
fans
d)
On/Off Yes
Yes
Yes
switch for fans
11) Compartment and doorway fittings
a)
Cushioned Yes
Yes
Yes
seats and back
rests
b)
Cushioned Yes
Yes
Yes
berths
c) Longitudinal L
L
L
luggage racks
i) Light (L)
ii) Sturdy (S)
d) Folding or Yes
Yes
Yes
fixed table
e)
Roof
ventilators
i) Compartment No
No
No
ii) Doorway
No
No
No
f) Bottle holder Yes
Yes
Yes
First
class
ii) Size/type of
fan
a) Compartment
(Swivelling = S)
(Fixed = F)
b) lavatory
2Tier
sleeper
b) Lavatory
First
class
B. Fannage
i) No of fans
a) Compartment
3Tier
sleeper
One
per
bert
h
No
3 per bay
3 per 3 per 3
bay
bay
per
bay
No
No
400
mm
(F)
200
mm
(F)
No
400
mm
(S)
No
No
No
400 mm 400
(F)
mm
(F)
No
No
400
mm
(F)
No
400
mm
(S)
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
NA
Yes
Yes
NA
NA
NA
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Page 12 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
First
class
2Tier
sleeper
3Tier
sleeper
Chair car
First
class
sleeper
Day
coach
General
Double
Decker
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
NA
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
NA
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No.
Yes
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
b) Wash basin
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
g) Waste paper
basket dust bin
i)Compartment
ii) Door way
h) Foot rest
i) Notices
j) Mirror with
shelf
i) Compartment
ii) Doorway
k) Coat hook
l) Foot steps
m)
Magazine
pouch
n) Wash basin
i) Compartment
ii) Door way
o) Ward robe
with
fixed
hangers
p) Water cooler
q)
Drinking
water
with
container
r) Thali rack
s) Linen room
t) Rings below No
berths
for
securing
luggage
No
Page 13 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
First
class
2Tier
sleeper
3Tier
sleeper
Chair car
First
class
sleeper
Day
coach
General
Double
Decker
c) Towel rail
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
d)Flushing
commode
Three
One
One
One
One
One
Nil
Nil
Nil
e) Flushing pan
One
Three
Three
all
all
all
Yes
Yes
Thre
e
Yes
Three
Thre
e
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
h) Mirror shelf
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
i) Bottle opener
j) Coat hook
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
LC
LC
LC
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
l) Lavatory chutes should be slanting so that ground is not visible from inside and lavatory
discharge does not fall on rails and track fasteners.
m) Inter communication
Inter communication doors shall be provided between the two classes of accommodation in a
composite coach.
13) External fittings
a) Reservation
Yes
display plates
b) Destination
Yes
board
c) No. plates on
Yes
mail & express
trains only
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
yes
Page 14 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Table 11.2
This existing table should be treated as cancelled and the corrected/modified table is given
below:
Safety requirements
SCHEDULE OF PASSENGER AMENITY FITTINGS FOR BG COACHES
1 Per
2
berth
2 per
4
Berth
1 Per
Bay
1 Per
Bay
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
NA
Double
Decker
General
Day
coach
First
class
sleeper
Chair
car
ii)Lavatory
iii) Corridor
b) Internal
latches at top
and bottom on
body side
doors
c) Provision of
pad locking
arrangement
from outside
on one body
side door
d)
Internal
latch
and
shout
bolts
with notched
stopper
and
outside
pad
locking
arrangement
for
compartment
sliding door
3Tier
sleeper
a) Alarm pull
No. of per
i)
Compartment
2Tier
sleeper
Description
1 per
Bay
6
Total
6
Total
One
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
NA
NA
NA
Yes
NA
NA
NA
NA
6
1 Per
Tota 2
l
berth
2 per
4
Berth
Page 15 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Day coach
First class
Yes
NA
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
f) Shout bolts
and sliding
door bolts for
swing doors
and pad
locking for
rolling shutters
of vestibules
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
g) Latches for
windows
shutters of
body side
doors and
partition walls
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
h) Fire
extinguishers
No
No
No
No
No
i) Safety bars
on all window
opening
No
No
No
No
Excep
t four
Exce
pt
four
Exce
pt
four
Exce
pt
four
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
j) Windows
shutters
i) Glass
shutters
Double
Decker
Yes
General
NA
sleeper
Chair car
e) Throw over
latch and Pad
Locking
arrangement
for sliding of
vestibule
2Tier
sleeper
3Tier
sleeper
First class
Safety requirements
SCHEDULE OF PASSENGER AMENITY FITTINGS FOR BG COACHES
Description
Air conditioned coaches
Non Air conditioned coaches
Page 16 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
General
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
iv) Frosted
single glass
sealed window
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
v) Louvre cum
Frosted glass
liftable type
shutters
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
vi) provision of
emergency
openable
window
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Double
Decker
Day coach
No
First class
No
Chair car
No
3Tier
sleeper
No
2Tier
sleeper
ii) Louvre
shutters
First class
sleeper
Safety requirements
SCHEDULE OF PASSENGER AMENITY FITTINGS FOR BG COACHES
Description
Air conditioned coaches
Non Air conditioned coaches
Page 17 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Annexure III
Vscqy&11-1
orZeku Vscqy fujLr dh tkrh gS lakksf/kr Vscqy fuEufyf[kr gSA
chth dksp esa ;k=h lqfo/kkvksa ds
fooj.k
okrkuqdwfyr dksp
izFke 2
3 Vh;j
Js.kh Vh;j
Lyhij
Lyhij
1- fdukjs ls ikVhZlu ds Qsl dh xgjkbZ
616
635
I. lhV cSBus ds fy;s 785
yEckbZ
665
fod.kZ
616
600
II. oFkZ lksus ds fy;s 785
yEckbZ yEckbZ
665
635
fod.kZ fod.kZ
2- yEckbZ
2010 1831
1810
I. cFkZ
680
785
ugha
785
ugha
Mcy
Msdj
618
yEckbZ
610
fod.kZ
618
yEckbZ
610
fod.kZ
592
607
505
ugha
ugha
ugha
2010
1833
ugha
1800
ugha
550
550
450
610
490
415
504
450
340
305
&
340
340
340
340
&
420
420
405
405
420
405
405
405
957
675
ugha
900
675
ugha
&
ugha
590
600
435
700
590
550
565
570
1896
1836
,u ,
2312
1800
1702
1575
izFke
Js.kh
1500
170
2
esa ;k=h lqfo/kkvksa ds fy;s dh xbZ fQfVax dh vuqlwph
okrkuqdwfyr dksp
izFke 2 Vh;j 3 Vh;j ps;j
Js.kh Lyhij Lyhij dkj
1600 &
&
,u ,
Page 18 of 47
Mcy
Msdj
&
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
,u-,
,u-,
&
1020
,u ,
,u ,
,u
,
,u ,
710
540
540
,u ,
710
554
518
488
535
II. dwik
710
,u ,
,u ,
,u ,
710
,u ,
,u
,
,u ,
,u ,
1-56
1-1
1-1
1-6
1-1
1-4
1-5
1-59
12
16
18
18
27
23
36
23
32
36
18
36
36
30
72
40
16
16
gkW
40
16
16
ugha
40
16
16
gkW
30
11
11
gkW
30
11
ugha
30
11
ugha
30
11
ugh
8- 'kkSpky;
I. vUnj dk {ks=Qy oxZ 1-6
ehVj esa
6
II.- izfr 'kkSpky;
;kf=;ksa
dh vf/kdre la[;k
9- cksMh lkbM Mksj
12
I. izfr njoktk ;kf=;ksa
dh vf/kdre la[;k
10-fctyh dh vko;drk
,& izdkk laca/kh
i) QlZ ry ls 840 ,e,e
apkbZ ij {kSfrt ry ij
U;ure yDl
40
a) dEikVZe.s V
16
b) 'kkSpky;
16
c) dksjhMksj
gkW
ii) Nr dh ykbV ds fy;s
izFkd fLop
Ckhth dksp
fooj.k
izFke
Js.kh
iii) fLop lfgr cFkZ
jhfMax
ykbV
iv) ukbV ykbV
v) ukbV ykbV ds fy;s
izFkd fLop
vi) 'kkSpky; Hkjs gksus dh
ykbV
gkW
40
16
16
gkW
,u ,
Mcy
Msdj
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
ugha
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
Ugha
ugha
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
Page 19 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
ugha
ugha
ugh
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
Ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkW
gkW
ugha
gkW
Ugha
gkW
ugha
gkW
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
nks cFkZ
ds fy;s
,d
,d
izfr
'kkSpky
;
,d
izfr
xyh
,d
izfr
'kkSpk
y;
,d
izfr
cFkZ
,d
izfr
'kkSpk
y;
3 izfr
xyh
3
izfr
xyh
ugha
3 izfr
xyh
3 izfr
xyh
ugha
ugha
,d izfr ,d
'kkSpky; izfr
'kkSpk
y;
ugha
ii) ia[kksa dk
vkdkj@izdkj
fooj.k
a a) dEikVZeVsa
?kweus okys &,l
fLFkj&,Q
b) 'kkSpky;
c) ia[kksa ds fy;s
jsxqysVj
gkW
gkW
d) vkWu vkQ
fLop ia[kksa ds
fy;s
11- dEikVZeVsa ,oa Mksj os dh fQfVax
gkW
Ukgha
Mcy
Msdj
400
,e
,e
,Q
ugha
400 ,e 400
,e ,Q ,e
,e
,Q
ugha
ugha
400 ,e 400
,e
,e
,Q
,e
,Q
ugha
Ukgha
gkW
Ukgha
Ukgha
Ukgha
Ukgha
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
Page 20 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
ugh
gkW
gkW
,y
gkW
,y
gkW
,y
ugha
,l
gkW
,y
gkW
ugha
ughaW
,l
Ukgha
,l
ugha
,y
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
ugha
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
Mcy
Msdj
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkW
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkWa
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkWa
ugha
Ugh
ugha
gkWa
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
ugha
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkW
miyC/k
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkW
ugha
gkW
gkW
ugh
gkW
gkW
gkW
ughaW
ugha
ugha
gka
ugha
ugh
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
Page 21 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
2- Mksj os
ih fQDl gSaxj ds lkFk
ckMZ jkso
ugh
gkW
gkW
ugha
gkW
ugh
gkW
ughW
gkW
ugha
gkW
ugha
gkW
ugha
gkW
ugha
gkW
ugha
gkW
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugh
ugh
gk
ughW
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
,l Fkkyh jsd
Vh fyfuu jsd
;w cFkZ ds uhps lkeku
dh lwj{kk ds fy; fjax
ugha
gkW
gkW
gk
gkW
gkW
ugh
gkW
gkW
gka
ughW
ugh
ugha
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
12 'kkSpky; dh fQfVax
fooj.k
, 'kkoj ckFk
ch okk osflu
lh Vkoy jsy
Mh ysfax deksM
b ysfkax isu
Ukgha
gkW
ugha
,d
rhu
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
leL
r
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
leLr
Mcy
Msdj
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
leL
r
,Q yksVk Hkjus ds
fy, iqk dkd
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
th deksM jsy
,p fejj 'kSYQ
vkbZ cksry vksiuj
ts dksV gqd
ds lksi fMl ,l Mh
fyD;wM lksi d.Vsuj
,y lh
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
nksuks
gkW
gkW
ugha
gkW
,y lh
gkW
gkW
Ugha
gkW
,y lh
gkW
gkW
ugha
gkW
,y
lh
gkW
gkW
ugha
gkW
,l Mh
gkW
gkW
ugha
gkW
,l Mh
gkW
ugha
ugha
gkW
,l
Mh
gkW
ugha
ugha
gkW
,l Mh
ugha
gkW
ugha
gkW
,l
Mh
,y kkSpky; ds P;wV <yok gksuk pkfg;s ftl ls vUnj ls tehu ugha fn[kkbZ ns rFkk kkSSpky; fxjus okyk
inkFkZ jsyksa de ij rFkk Vsd QkLVujksa ij u fxjsA
Maintenance manual for BG coaches of ICF design (correction slip)
Page 22 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
,e vUrj vkokxeu
vUrj vkokxeu ds fy, nks Js.kh ds dksp ds chp njoktk dEiksftV esa fn;k tk;sxkA
13 ckgjh fQfVax
, fjtosZku lwpuk iV
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
ugha
Ukgha
ch MsfLVusku cksMZ
xarO; iVV
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
Vscqy&11-2
orZeku Vscqy fujLr dh tkrh gS lakksf/kr Vscqy fuEufyf[kr gSA
fooj.k
, vykeZ iqy dh
la[;k izfr
1 dEikVZesaV
lqj{kk laca/kh
Ckhth dksp esa ;k=h lqfo/kkvksa ds
okrkuqdwfyr dksp
izFke 2 Vh;j 3 Vh;j
Js.kh
Lyhij Lyhij
1
2
2
4
2 yscksVjh
3 dksjhMksj
2
ch ckMh lkbM Mksj ds gkW
ij uhps ds vUn:uh
pVduh ySp
lh ,d ckMh lkbM
gkW
Mksj esa iSaM ykd yxkus
dh O;oLFkk ckgj dh
vksj ls
izfr
cFkZ
izfr
cFkZ
vko;drk;sa
fy;s dh xbZ fQfVax dh vuqlwph
Okkrkuqdwyu jfgr dksp
ps;j izFke
Lyhij
Ms
lkekU;
dkj
Js.kh
dksp
1 izfr
os
1 izfr
os
6
dqy
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
1
2
2
4
izfr
cFkZ
izfr
cFkZ
Mcy
Msdj
1 izfr os 6
dqy
6 dqy
2
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
,u-,- ,u-,-
,u-,-
Page 23 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Mh dEikVZeVsa ds
LykbfMax Mksj ds fy;s
vUn:uh ySp rFkk
kkmV oksYV ds lkFk
ysp LVksij rFkk ckgj
ls iSM ykd dh
O;oLFkkA
bZ Fkzks vksoj ySp rFkk
iSM ykd dh O;oLFkk
osLVO;wy ds LykbfMax
Mksj ds fy;s
gkW
,u-,-
,u-,-
,u-,- gkW
,u-,-
,u-,- ,u-,-
,u-,-
,u-,-
,u-,-
,u-,-
,u-,- gkW
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
Page 24 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
fooj.k
,Q osLVO;wy ds
jksfyax kVj ds iSM
ykd LobZax njoky ds
fy;s vkmV cksYV rFkk
LykvfMax Mksj cksYV
dh o;oLFkk
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkW
gkW
2
ugha
2
ugha
2
ugha
2
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
&pkj ds vfrfjDr&
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
ugha
gkW
gkW
ugha
ugha
gkW
gkW
ugha
ugha
gkW
gkW
ugha
ugha
gkW
gkW
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
ugha
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
gkW
Mcy
Msdj
gkW
gkW
Page 25 of 47
gkW
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Annexure IV
Write up on Depot facilities required in Coaching depots. This may be added to CAMTECH
manual
Classification of depots
For the purpose of providing standard facilities, carriage depots have been classified into the
following three categories:
Classification
Minor Depot
Medium Depot
Major Depot
2.
No. of Coaches
Based
Below 100
100 to 250
Above 250
Every depot should have a heavy repair and schedule bay (sick line) with a covered
accommodation capable of accommodating a minimum of 4% of the base stock at
the depot. For this purpose, each coach should be provided with a minimum of 35
meters of track length to leave adequate space on either side of the coach for running
out its bogies and wheels and still leave some room for staff to move around the
coach.
(ii)
For easy placement and removal as well as adjusting coaches at the work plce in sick
line, where possible, the length of one line under covered accommodation should not
be more than 4 coach lengths.
(iii)
The covered accommodation should normally consist of 15 meter wide bays, each
bay covering 2 tracks under it. The track should thus be 7.5 Meters apart to permit
free movement of material transport vehicles, at the same time providing working
and spare parts storage space.
(iv)
To attend to the under gear, a minimum of 50% of the covered lines should have
examination pits. Arrangement to provide pits over the entire length of half the
number of lines under the covered accommodation is preferable. The examination
pits should have efficient and effective drainage. Where low places are not available
nearby for draining out the pits, a minimum of two drain wells of adequate depth and
size should be provided along with proper pumping arrangements to ensure the
examination pits remaining dry all the time.
(v)
Covered accommodation should also have monorail girders covering the entire track
and wheel park tracks suitable for power operated 2 tonne hoists.
Page 26 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
(vi)
(vii)
3.
4.
For lifting of bogies and movement of heavy material, one 3 tonne hoist should be
provided for every two lines under covered accommodation. Major depots should
preferably be provided with a 20 tonne EOT crane.
Entire covered accommodation should have proper industrial lighting arrangements
for work during day and night.
Flooring
(i)
The entire covered area and pathways should be paved with a minimum of 150 mm
reinforced concrete so that the floor can withstand heavy stresses.
(ii)
The store room, vacuum cylinder overhauling section, machine section and similar
areas should also be laid with 150 mm thick reinforced concrete floor. The rest of
the areas should have 40mm thick concrete flooring.
(iii)
For whiting jacks to be used for lifting coaches, on either side of the tracks, a
reinforced concrete slab of 1.25m wide and 300mm thick and properly levelled,
should be provided at a suitable distance away from the rail.
Washing Line
(i)
(ii)
The washing line design and facilities should be as standardised by the Railway. Pit
for examination of under gear, running supplies of air, vacuum and water (both for
coach washing and tank filling), electrical outlets for hand tools, coach battery
charging and precooling of air-conditioned coaches, drainage for pit and
surroundings, paved pathways for movement of material trollies, trucks, etc., and
good illumination for attending to the rakes at night, are some of the essential
requirements of the washing line.
(iii)
It is desirable to have the facilities for placement and withdrawal of rakes from both
ends of the washing line.
(iv)
A well designed and constructed drainage system should be provided to the washing
line and its surrounding area. Collection pits and drain pumps should be provided at
places where seasonal water logging occurs. A clean, dry and well lighted
environment is required to ensure proper quality attention to the rakes at the washing
line.
Page 27 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
5.
6.
Minor
Depot
Medium
Depot
Major
Depot
1
1
1
1
-
1 Set
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1 Set
1
2
4
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
Minor
Depot
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
Medium
Depot
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
Major
Depot
1
1
Page 28 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Vacuum Cleaner
Pressure jet cleaner
Tools
Pneumatic handtools
a) Grinder
b) Drill
c) Chipper/buster
d) Riveter
Electric power tools
a) Pop riveting gun
b) Drill
c) Bolt tightener
Hand tools
Test Benches
Water Tank Test Rig
D.A.Valve Test Bench
Vac.Cyl.test bench
Slack adjuster test bench
DV Test Bench
Air brake single coach test rig
Office Equipment
Computer system
Plain Paper Copier
Telefax
7.
1
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
-
1
1
1
-
2
2
2
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
As required
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
(ii)
On ground floor:
Store room with adjoining fenced yard and a siding with loading/unloading
platform.
Tool room
Decolite room
Fitting and carpentry room
Painters room
Trimming room
Machine Maintenance Room
Welding booth
Machine shop
Garage for material handling vehicles
Vacuum exhauster and air compressor room
Page 29 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
8.
(iii)
On first floor
CWS room with attached bath
Supervisors rooms
Sick line TXRs room
Office
Computer room
Model room
Training cum conference room
Record room
Stationery store
Canteen with separate staircase
Toilet facilities should be provided on both floors depending on number of staff
working on each floor.
(iv)
Communication facilities
Minimum 5 numbers divisional railway telephone connections and 2 public (DOT)
telephone lines should be provided for the depot. These should be in addition to the
telephone lines required by the officers stationed at the depot. Also all sections of the depot
should be connected through an intercom. Walkie talkie sets with talk back facility should
be provided if the depot facilities are spread out over a large area.
9.
Page 30 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Annexure V
The existing Appendix A to D should be treated as cancelled and the corrected/modified
Appendix is given below:
APPENDIX- A
TRANSPORTATION CODES FOR COACHES
S.
No.
1
2
3
4
TRANSPORTATION
CODE
ART
CT
CTS
CZACEN
5
6
ERR
ERU
7
8
FCS
GS
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
LR
NMG
OHE
PPS
RA
RAAC
RD
RE
RH
RHV
RK
RN
RS
RT
RZ
SLR
SMN
VP
VPC
WACCNEN
29
30
WCB
WSCZACEN
DETAILS
ACCIDENT AND TOOL VAN OR RELIEF VAN
TOURIST CAR
TOURIST CAR FOR 2ND CLASS PASSENGERS
AIR CONDITIONED CHAIR CAR WITH END ON
GENERATION
FOUR / SIX WHEELER
FOUR / SIX WHEELER SELF PROPELLED
TOWER VAN
FIRST CLASS COUPE AND SECOND CLASS
SECOND
CLASS
FITTED
WITH
SELF
GENERATING EQUIPMENT
LUGGAGE WITH BRAKE VAN
NEW MODIFIED GOODS
OVER HEAD EQUIPEMNT INSPECTION CAR
FULL BOGIE POSTAL VAN
INSPECTION CARRIAGE ( ADMINISTRATIVE)
AIR CONDITIONED INSPECTION CAR
INSPECTION CARRIAGE (SUBORDINATE)
INSTRUCTION VAN (MOBILE TRAINING CAR)
MEDICAL VAN
AUXILIARY MEDICAL VAN
DYNAMOMETER CAR
GENERATING VAN
STORES VAN
ACCIDENT AND TOOL VAN OR RELIEF VAN
TRACK RECORDING CAR
SECOND CLASS LUGGAGE AND BRAKE VAN
POWER CAR WITH MID ON GENERATION
PARCEL VAN
PARCEL VAN CONVERTED
VESTIBULED AC 3-TIER WITH END-ON
GENERATION
VESTIBULED PANTRY CAR
VESTIBULED AC CHAIR CAR WITH END-ONGENERATION
Page 31 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
S.
No.
31
32
TRANSPORTATION
CODE
WCTAC
WFACEN
33
34
WFC
WGACCN
35
WGACCW
36
WACCWEN
37
WGFAC
38
39
WGFACCW
WGSCN
40
WGSCNLR
41
WGSCZ
42
WGSCZAC
43
WGSD
44
45
WLRRM
WSCZACEN
46
WSLRN
47
WGSCZJ
48
WGSRJ
49
WGSCZACJ
DETAILS
VESTIBULED AIR CONDITIONED TOURIST CAR
VESTIBULED AIR CONDITIONED FIRST CLASS
WITH END ON GENERATION
VESTIBULED FIRST CLASS
VESTIBULED AIR CONDITIONED THREE TIER
WITH
SELF
GENERATING
ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT
VESTIBULED AIR CONDITIONED TWO TIER WITH
SELF GENERATING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
VESTIBULED AIR CONDITIONED TWO TIER
SLEEPER WITH END ON GENERATION
VESTIBULED AIR CONDITIONED FIRST CLASS
WITH SELF GENERATING ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT
VESTIBULED FIRST CUM AC 2-TIER SLEEPER
VESTIBULED SECOND CLASS THREE TIER
SLEEPER WITH SELF GENERATING EQUIPMENT
VESTIBULED SECOND CLASS THREE TIER
SLEEPER WITH LUGGAGE AND BRAKE VAN
VESTIBULED SECOND CLASS CHAIR CAR WITH
SELF GENERATING ELECTRICAL EQUIPENT
VESTIBULED SELF GENERATING SECOND AC
CHAIR CAR
VESTIBULED SECOND CLASS DOUBLE DECKER
WITH
SELF
GENERATING
ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT
POWER CAR END-ON-GENERATION
VESTIBULED AIR CONDITIONED SECOND
CLASS CHAIR CAR WITH END ON GENERATION
VESTIBULED SECOND CLASS, BRAKE CUM
LUGGAGE AND POWER CAR
VESTIBULED SECOND CLASS CHAIR CAR FOR
JAN SHATABDI COACHES.
VESTIBULED SECOND CLASS CHAIR CUM
BRAKE VAN FOR JAN SHATABDI COACHES.
VESTIBULED SECOND CLASS AC CHAIR CAR
FOR JAN SHATABDI COACHES.
Page 32 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
APPENDIX B
ITEMS WHICH MUST BE CHANGED
DURING POH OF BG COACHES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Page 33 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
APPENDIX - C
MODIFCATIONS IN BG COACHING STOCK
(RDSOs Letter No. MC/CB/MARS Dtd. 24.06.98)
Sr.
No.
1
07
08
09
10
11
12
Description of Modifications
Sketch / Drg.
No.
Adoption
of
worn
and RDSO SK intermediate profile of wheels
92082 &
91146
Standardisation of 16t.
RDSO SK Equalising Stay on all new
88105 &
coaches
93236
Provision of locking
RDSO SK arrangement for guide caps of 85070 alt. 3
a) Existing Bogies,
T-0-1-638
b) New Bogies
Axle end locking arrangement ICF Drg. No.
for direct mounted spherical
T-0-2-637 alt.
roller bearings
a
Procedure for manufacture
ICF Drg: no. 1and inspection of bolster
0-5-639
suspension hangers
Schedule of technical
Spec. C-9406
requirement of silent block for (Rev.1)
anchor link
Lowering of attendant berth to RCF Drg. No.
approx. 600 mm. from floor
M1000517
level in AC coaches
Earmarking of one seat in GS RDSO SK coaches for physically
96078
handicap person
STR No. C - 9503 for
Spec. No. Cupholstery cloth for coaching
9503
amendment
slip 1
Schedule of requirement for
Spec. C- 9602
LP sheet
with amend
slip 1
Provision of APD for foot
RDSO SK
plate of vestibule by welding
95199
of washer with securing pin
Provision of compression
RDSO SK
spring to support canvas
96006
vestibule frame
Applicability
Railways and Production
Units
Production Units only
Page 34 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Sr.
No.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Description of Modifications
Sketch / Drg.
No.
Modified pin for 'Z' lever
RDSO SK
hanger to avoid working out of 98127
bushes in the brackets
Color coding of SAB spindles
for different length
Revised locations for fixing
holes in buffer case to
minimize cracking of head
stock
Provision of PVC flooring and
aluminium
chequered plate in doorways
and gangways
Use of high performance
grease viz Servogem - RR3 and
Balmerol Multi-grease in roller
bearing axle boxes
Use of plastic axle guide
bushes to STR - C-8215
(Rev.II)
Elimination of roof filling
arrangement and provision of
foot step and handle in lieu of
ladder
Interior colour scheme
Provision of FRP tissue on
trough floor, sole bar, turn
under and side wall
Modification to increase linen
room capacity in 2tier AC
coaches
Modification of suspension of
under slung water tank
provided under AC Coaches
Applicability
Railways and Production
Units
RDSO SK 84102
RDSO SK 90088
Railways only
RDSO SK 90068
ICF Drg. No.
ICF SK- 9-0890
RDSO SK 88103 Alt.2
Railways only
Page 35 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Sr.
No.
25
26
27
Description of Modifications
Provision of wall type fans in
the lavatories of AC coaches
Modification for pad locking of
body side door from inside of
a coach
Provision of TRA type roof
ventilators
Sketch / Drg.
No.
RDSO SK
87020
Applicability
Railways and Production
Units
Railways and Production
Units
30
Provision of aluminium
chequered flooring in pantry
portion, washing room and
door ways of PCs.
RDSO SK
85121
(existing),
85120 (new)
31
RDSO SK
83014 alt. 1
Completed, may be
treated as standard
32
33
28
29
34
35
RDSO SK
85020
RDSO SK
84162
RDSO SK
76020 alt. 7
Railways only
Page 36 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Sr.
No.
36
Description of Modifications
Provision of M24 bolt and nuts
for fitment of bottom cover to
the centre pivot flange with
bent plate anti rotation of bolts
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Sketch / Drg.
No.
ICF Drg. No.
ICF/ SK-1-1135 and
RDSO SK75108 alt. 1
-
Spec. No. 04
ABR 94,
amendment
Slip 4
Modification in design of RDSO SK
existing 13t. equalising stay & 88018 alt. 6
safety strap
and SK
97022
Provision of rubber stopper to
RDSO SK
maintain axle box crown
97068
clearance
Provision of FRP frame glass
ICF /SK- 5-4shutter as alternative to
094 and spec.
aluminium shutter
C-9403
Provision of FRP banjo shutter ICF / SK-5-5as alternative to aluminium
020 & Spec.
shutter
C-9403 with
amend. slip
no. 1 &2
Provision of UHMWPE/NFTC
RDSO SKaxle box packing
97072 & STR
No. C-9703
Standardisation of seats and
RDSO SKberths
97051, 97052,
97053, 97054
& 97055
Use of single piece FRP louvre RDSO SKshutter
97020 & STR
C- 9403 with
amend slip 1 &
2
Applicability
Railways and Production
Units
Railways only
Railways only
Railways only
Page 37 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Sr.
No.
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Description of Modifications
Semi-permanent locking
arrangement for unused
vestibule doors
Slack adjuster articulation
arrangement in vacuum
braked coaches
Brake beam for air braked
coaches & brake beam test
procedure
Modified design of brake head
and brake shoe key for snug
fitting of brake block.
Increased length of 30 mm of
brake block hanger
Modification to passenger
alarm system in vacuum brake
system
Use of ventury type chute for
lavatories
Modification to safety strap for
axle guide arrangement and
axle box lug
Provision of emergency
openable window in non AC
coaches
Provision of closing piece and
inspection door on sliding door
pocket in luggage
compartment of SLR /
WLRRM coaches
Sketch / Drg.
No.
RDSO SK84179 &
84154
RDSO SK
96102 alt. 1
Applicability
Railways and Production
Units ( in vestibule with
sliding doors)
Railways only
RDSO SK 96040
Railways only
ICF / SK-6-3324
RDSO SK 90005 alt. 2
Production Units
Page 38 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
Sr.
No.
59
Description of Modifications
Fitment of UIC vestibule on
coaches
60
61
62
63
64
Sketch / Drg.
No.
Spec C-8812
rev. I RDSO
Sk-88058, alt.5
& Sk-88059,
alt. 5
RDSO SK81039, 82023,
84018, 84116,
84132 and
93186 alt. 2
RDSO SK93289, 93340
& 82010
Spec. C- K210 (Rev. 3),
SK- K 2048
RDSO Sk79061 & Sk79067
RDSO-SK.
98161 (Alt.1),
ICF/STD 5 4-005, ICF/SK.
5-4-168
Applicability
Railways and Production
Units
Page 39 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
APPENDIX D
LIST OF RDSO TECHNICAL PAMPHLETS
S.
SPEC REV AMEND
DESCRIPTION
No.
No.
1
C-6803
Maintenance & repair procedure for hydraulic
shockabsorbers used on coaching stock.
2
C-7103
Instructions for examination and maintenance of bogies
and undergear of coach nominated to run at sanctioned
speed of 110 Kmph (BG)
3
C-73011
Direct admission valve for passenger coachesmaintenance instructions.
4
C-7511
Instructions for adjustment of buffer height of ICF built
BG coaches in W/shops and depots.
5
C-7512
Hindi version of C-7511, Adjustment of buffer height of
ICF BG coaches
6
C-7601
Description of water raising apparatus and instructions
for filling water in coaches fitted with underslung water
tanks.
7
C-7602 1
Instructions for corrosion repairs ICF built BG coaches.
8
C-7703
Instructions for inspection and maintenance of roller
bearing axle boxes of BG ICF bogies.
9
C-7801
Instructions for maintenance of ICF built MG All coil
bogie and undergear (max. speed 75 Kmph)
10
C-7807 1
Instruction for maintenance of bogie and u/gear of
Rajdhani Express coaches(BG)(for shops &
maint.depots)
11
C-7808
Hindi version of C-7807, maintenance of bogie and
undergear of Rajdhani coaches
12
C-7809
Instruction for inspection, repair & manufacturing
procedure for helical springs of ICF & Jessop's EMU
stock
13
C-7817
Instructions for inspection and maintenance of roller
bearing axle boxes of BG ICF bogies.
14
C-7901
Maintenance and repair procedure for Gabriel, vertical
hydraulic shock absorbers
15
C-7902
Hindi version of C-7901, maintenance and repair
procedure of Gabriel shock absorber
16
C-7903
Instructions for inspection and maintenance of roller
bearing axle boxes of BG ICF bogies.
17
C-7907
Wheel & axle manual.
Page 40 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
S.
SPEC REV AMEND
DESCRIPTION
No.
No.
18
C-8005
Quality assurance specification for K-Type composition
brake block supplied by M/s Rane
19
C-8215 2
Schedule of Requirements for plastic guide bush for axle
box guide of ICF/BG bogie (tentative).
20
C-8217 1
Schedule of Requirements for aluminium chequered
sheets for use as flooring material on coaching stock.
21
C-8219
Fibre glass reinforced plastic in railway coaches
22
C-8305
Antipilferage measures for compartment, lavotory and
other coaching stock fittings
23
C-8409 1
Tentative Schedule of requirements for sheet moulding
compound to be used for manufacture of FRP products
for passenger coaches
24
C-8415
Tentative Schedule of Requirements for FRP seat cum
back rests of Indian railway coaches
25
C-8419 1
Maintenance procedure for Helical springs coaching
stock (BG & MG)
26
C-8421 1
Tentative Schedule of Requirements for FRP Wall
protector for bath room of coaching stock of IR (SK83114)
27
C-8515 2
Schedule of Requirements for flexible PVC flooring for
passenger coaches (tentative).
28
C-8517 1
Schedule of requirements for anerobic adhesive for use
on coaching stock (tentative).
29
C-8518 1
Hindi version of C-8517, anarobic adhesive for use in
coaches
30
C-8521
Specification for tight lock centre buffer coupler for
coaching stock.
31
C-8522
Hindi version of C-8521, tight lock centre buffer coupler
for coaching stock
32
C-8523
STR for CBC coupler for coaching stock.
33
C-8525
STR for UIC flange type vestibule for BG coaches with
CBC only (for screw coupling arrangement Ref. C8812).
34
C-8526 1
Procedure for Manual Arc Welding of wear plates(IRS:
R-65-78)
35
C-8527
Roller bearing specification.
36
C-8531
Particular specification for BG(1676 MM) all metal
integral light weight self-generating 1st class air
conditioned coaches.
37
C-8533
Particular specification for BG all metal light weight
coaches.
Maintenance manual for BG coaches of ICF design (correction slip)
Page 41 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
S.
SPEC REV AMEND
DESCRIPTION
No.
No.
38
C-8605
STR for nylon guide roller/wearing piece for retractable
footplate.
39
C-8606
Hindi version of C-8605, nylon guide roller / wear piece
for retractable foot plate
40
C-8625
Note on cleaning media for use in bearing cleaning
plants.
41
C-8629
Report of committee on reduction of weight of coaches
42
C-8703 1
Specification for shock absorber.
43
C-8805
Instructions for inspection/maintenance of air brake
equipment on passenger coaches.
44
C-8810 3
Specification for disc brake equipment for passenger
coaches of IR (BG)
45
C-8812 1
Schedule of Requirements for UIC type elastomer flange
connections for intercommunication between passenger
coaches.
46
C-8903
Schedule of requirement for hot cases operated by
liquified petroleum gas for installation in Rly. pantry cars.
47
C-8904
Procedure for recambering of MG ICF coaches
48
C-8910 1
Schedule of technical requirements for direct admission
valve.
49
C-8914 1
Schedule of requirements for flexible load bearing
polyurethene foam to be used in berth and seats of
passenger coaches.
50
C-9001
Procedure for laying PVC flooring in passenger coaches
51
C-9009
Description of water raising system to SK-86209 and
Instructions for filling water for air braked coaches
52
C-9011
Quality assurance specification for `L' type Ferrodo
quality 89/24 composition brake blocks for passenger
trains
53
C-9019 1
Schedule of technical requirement for water purifier
54
C-9101
Specification for electric train set.
55
C-9103
Schedule of Technical requirements for plastic sheets
(filled PVC) for use in interior roof ceiling of passenger
coaches
56
C-9105
Schedule of Technical Requirements for FRP axle box
front covers for all coil ICF type bogies for passenger
coaches (BG)
57
C-9121
Schedule of Requirements for push cock (tentative)
58
C-9123 1
Schedule of Requirements for plastic lavatory chute
(tentative)
59
C-9125
Schedule of Requirement for plastic packing ring
(tentative)
Maintenance manual for BG coaches of ICF design (correction slip)
Page 42 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
S.
SPEC REV AMEND
DESCRIPTION
No.
No.
60
C-9202
Technical specification for fabricated bogie frame
/bolsters for coaching stock
61
C-9203
Schedule of Requirements for plastic brake gear bushes
for passenger coaches (acetal)
62
C-9212
Guide for approval of manufacturers for supply of bolster
suspension hangers for main line coaches and EMU
stock
63
C-9213
Guide for Approval of manufactures for supply of screw
couplings for main line coaches and wagon stock
64
C-9301-U
65
66
C-9302-U
C-9303 1
67
68
C-9306-U
C-9307 1
69
C-9309-U 1
70
71
72
C-9313-U 1
C-9314-U
C-9318-U
73
74
C-9321
C-9322
75
C-9403
76
C-9406
77
C-9407
78
C-9408
79
C-9501
Page 43 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
S.
SPEC REV AMEND
DESCRIPTION
No.
No.
80
C-9502
Schedule of Technical Requirements for fibre glass
reinforced (SMC) window guides and sills for use in
coaches
81
C-9503
Schedule of Requirements for upholstery cloth for
coaching stock
82
C-9505 Revi
STR for high tensile steel screw coupling
sed
83
C-9509 1
STR for alloy steel draw hooks on railway coaches
84 C-K-511
Schedule of Requirements for Natural Fibre Thermo-set
Composite (NFTC) Sheets for roof ceiling of passenger
coaches (tentative)
85
C-9601
Tentative Specification for Natural Fibre Com-posite
board for use in flooring in passenger coaches.
86
C-9602
87
C-9702
88
C-9703
89
C-9704
90
C-9705
91
C-9802
92
C-9803
93
C-9805
94
C-9808
95
C-9809
96
C-9810
97
C-9901
Page 44 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
S.
SPEC REV AMEND
DESCRIPTION
No.
No.
98
C-9904 1
STR for Insecticidal Paint for Coach Interiors.(Tentative)
99
C-9905
STR for Specially Treated Brake Pins (Alternative to
Electroplating.)
100 C-9906
STR for Controlled Discharge Toilets for Indian Rly.
Coaches.(BG)
101 C-9907 2
Specification for L-Type Composition Brake Block for
Mainline Coaches.
102 C-9908
STR for Boilogical Toilets in Indian Rly. Coaches.
103 C-9911 3
STR for Fire Retardent Curtain Fabric.
104 C-9912
Tentative Specification Natural Fibre Reinforced Pannels
(NFRP) for use in Raiway Coaches
105 C-K013
Specification for Bogie Mounted Bracke Cylinder with in
Slack Aduster for EMU & Mainline Panssenger Coaches.
106 C-K102
STR for Silent block for Centr Pivot of mainline coaches
107 C-K105
2
STR for boster suspension Hanger of mainline & EMU
Coaches
108 C-K106
STR of Air Suspension Systemfor EMU / DMU Coaches
and Coaching Container Flat Bogies (Part A & B )
109 C-K201
Specification for Stainless Steel / Plates for Coaches of
Indian Railways.
110 C-K202
1
Schedule of Requirement for Hanger Block of Mainline &
EMU Coaches.
111 C-K207 4
Schedule of technical requirement of modular toilets for
Indian Railways Coaches (BG).
112 C-K208
1
STR for Prelaminated Shaded Compreg for use in Rly.
Coaches.
113 C-K209
Specification for distribution valve with relay valve for air
brake system of passenger stock of I. Rly.
114 C-K210 2
1
STR for high capacity buffer springs for side buffers of
BG coaches.
115 C-K211 1
Specification for non-asbestos based low friction
composite brake blocks for application on MG Coaching
Stock of I. Rlys.
116 C-K213 1
Schedule of Technical Requirement for manufacturing of
FRP main doors for passenger coaches (BG) and
EMU's.
117 C-K214 1
Requirements of infrastructure facilities of manufacture
Dashpot Rubber packing ring.
118 C-K307
STR for Rhenolic Bushes to be used in the brake gear of
ICF BG coaches.
119 C-K308
STR for Thermoplastic Polyurethane wearing piece for
side bracket of BG coaches
Maintenance manual for BG coaches of ICF design (correction slip)
Page 45 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
S.
SPEC REV AMEND
DESCRIPTION
No.
No.
120 C-K309
STR for Deurified Thermal Bonded Polyester Blocks for
use in Railway coaches.
121 C-K401
STR for friction snubber for prymary suspension of BG
main line all coil bogies for operation at max. speed of
105Kmph .
122 C-K404
Specification for double sealed unit(DSU) for AC
coaches.
123 C-K405
STR for capsule type sock absorber for primary
suspension for B.G.(1676 mm) main line ICF all coil
bogies.
124 C-K406
STR for Air spring assbly.for higher capacity loads used
on MEMU/DMU&EMU coaches.
125 C-K407
STR for Air suspension control equipments for air spring
assbly.system with ICF/LHB type bogie.
126 C-K409
STR for high capacity HYTREL upper and lower washers
used in the primary suspension for B.G. mainline
coaches.
127
CMIMaintenance Instructions for IRY coaches fitted with IR9801
20 Bogie
128
CMIMaintenance Instructions for Retrofitted Air Suspension
1
9802
Bogie for DC EMU.
129
CMIMaintenance Instructions for Enhanced Draw Gear And
2
9901
Screw Couplings of BG Main line Coaches
130
CMIProcedure of IOH on Broad Gauge (1676) IRY Coaches
9903
having IR-20 Bogies
131
Maintenance Manual for EMU AC/DC and Mainline EMU
CMIStock Bogie & Undergear of AC EMU DC EMU &MEMU
K001
Fitted with Steel Spring Suspension Arrangement.
132
CMIInspection of wheels on openline and Workshops
K003
133
CMIInstructions for maintenance of bogie and undergear of
K301
Jan Shatabdi coaches (BG) (For shops and maintenance
depot).
134
CMI1
Instructions for corrosion repairs of ICF/RCF built MG
K302
coaches.
135
CMIInstructions for maintenance of axle box guide
K303
arrangement for main line ICF/RCF type bogies
(BG/MG). (Supersedes C - 7715)
136
CMIMaintenance manual of bogie, brake, brake gear and
K401
coupler for HHPDMU stock (1400 hp) fitted with air
suspension ( BG - 1676 mm)
137
CMIK402
Code of practice for prevension of fires on DMUs.
Maintenance manual for BG coaches of ICF design (correction slip)
Page 46 of 47
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 01 (07.2006)
S.
SPEC REV AMEND
DESCRIPTION
No.
No.
138 WD-04Schedule of requirements for Nylon bush for brake gear
Nylon
for mainline coaches.
bushes2002
139
G-92
Maintenance Manual for IRSA - 600 slack adjuster.
140
G-97
2
Maintenance Manual of Air brake system for frieght
stock.
141 M&C/PC
Specification for cleaning solution.
N/
101/2001
142 02-ABRSpecification for Air brake system for frieght & passenger
2002
stock for I. Rlys.
143 R-64/98 Revi
STR for upper & lower rubber washerfor mailine
sed
coaches.
144 R-19/93
Wheels.
145
R-35/
146 IRS-M-41
Corrosion resistance high tensile strength steel (corton
steel)
Page 47 of 47
(Govt. of India)
(Ministry of Railways)
IRCAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS-02 (09/2006)
September2006
Centre
for
Advanced
Maintenance
TECHnology
Excellence in Maintenance
MAHARAJPUR, GWALIOR--474020
"
I-INDIAN RAILWAYS
All CMEs
.......,
Indian Railway.
...,
'-
...
3~
For Executive Director
..
Copy: EDME/Coaching/ Rly Board
ED/ Carriage/ RDSO
DME/Coaching/ Rly Board
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 02(09.2006)
1.
CAMTEC
H
MANUAL
REF.
Ch 1
Pg 35
Sr. No. 10
annexure1 .1
brake power
certificate
(Both Hindi
& English)
Hindi
version
EXISTING INSTUCTIONS
MODIFIED/CORRECTED
INSTRUCTIONS
REMARKS
As per RB
letter
no.98/M(C
THIS CERTIFICATE IS VALID /137/19/Pt.
PROVIDED THE RAKE INTEGRITY I/Dt:25.08.
IS NOT BROKEN OR CHANGED, 06
OR THE TRAIN ENGINE IS NOT
CHANGED. IF RAKE INTEGRITY IS
BROKEN OR THE TRAIN ENGINE
IS CHANGED, THIS CERTIFICATE
SHOULD BE REVALIDATED BY
ENGINEER
( C&W)
THROUGH ENDORSEMENT IN
THE COLUMN PROVIDED ON
REVERSE
AFTER
ENSURING
BRAKE CONTINUITY, PROVIDED
THE COACH ( ES ) BEING
ATTACHED, IF ANY, HAVE BEEN
MAINTAINED AS PER EXTANT
INSTRUCTIONS
Page 1 of 6
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 02(09.2006)
Sr.
No
2.
CAMTEC
H
MANUAL
REF.
EXISTING INSTUCTIONS
Appendix A
REMARKS
3.
MODIFIED/CORRECTED
INSTRUCTIONS
Appendix A
List
enclosed.
----------------
(ICF type)]
List
enclosed.
As per RB
letter No.
87/M(C/20
2/10 Vol.II
Page 2 of 6
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 02(09.2006)
APPENDIX- A-1
TRANSPORTATION CODES FOR BG COACHES (LHB TYPE)
S.
No.
TRANSPORTATION
CODE
DETAILS
1.
LWFAC
2.
LWGFAC
3.
LWACCW
4.
LWGACCW
5.
LWACCN
6.
LWGACCN
7.
LWCBAC
8.
LWLRRM
9.
LGS
10.
LWGSCN
11.
LGSLR
12.
LWFCZAC
13.
LWSCZAC
Page 3 of 6
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 02(09.2006)
APPENDIX- A-2
TRANSPORTATION CODES FOR BG COACHES ICF TYPE
S.
No.
TRANSPORTATION
CODE
DETAILS
1.
WGFAC
2.
WFAC
3.
WGACCW
4.
WACCW
5.
WGACCN
6.
WACCN
7.
WGFCWAC
8.
WFCWAC
9.
WCCWNAC
10.
WGSCZAC
11.
WFCZAC
12.
WSCZAC
13.
WGFC
14.
WGSCN
15
GS
16.
WGSCZ
17.
GSD
18.
GSLR
Page 4 of 6
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 02(09.2006)
S.
No.
TRANSPORTATION
CODE
DETAILS
19.
GSLRD
20.
GSLRDAC
21.
GSRD
22.
WLRRM
23.
WGCB
PANTRYCAR (SG)
24.
WCBAC
25.
WGSZAJ
26.
WGSCZJ
27.
WGSCZRJ
28.
WACCNH
29.
WSCZACH
30.
WRRMDAC
31.
RA
32.
RAAC
33.
NMG
34.
PP
POSTAL VAN
35.
VP
PAREL VAN
36.
VPH
Page 5 of 6
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS 02(09.2006)
S.
No.
TRANSPORTATION
CODE
DETAILS
37.
VPU
38.
VR
39.
RT
40.
RH
MEDICAL VAN
41.
RE
TRAINING/INSPECTION VAN
42.
RU
Page 6 of 6
(Govt. of India)
(Ministry of Railways)
Centre
for
Advanced
Maintenance
TECHnology
Excellence in Maintenance
MAHARAJPUR, GWALIOR--474020
(Govt. of India)
(Ministry of Railways)
Centre
for
Advanced
Maintenance
TECHnology
Excellence in Maintenance
MAHARAJPUR, GWALIOR--474020
(Govt. of India)
(Ministry of Railways)
Centre
for
Advanced
Maintenance
TECHnology
Excellence in Maintenance
MAHARAJPUR, GWALIOR--474020
"'
~i)
I-INDIAN RAILWAYS
Engineer
...-.
---'
Please find enclosed herewith the 5th correction slip to Coaching Maintenance
,...
Manual for BG coaches of ICF design 02 copies of the same are being sent to
you for necessary action please.
~V,i,';'~
.
For Exec~irector
~-
Ofl-
'---'..'
C/EDME/Coaching/Rly.Bd
ED/Carriage/RDSO
...
Correction slip no.5 for Coaching Maintenance Manual for BG coaches of ICF design
Ref.: (I) Railway Boards letter No. 2007/M(C)/ 141/1 Dated 26/09/08
1. Reference above, the following modifications/amendments are being issued to Maintenance
Manual for BG coaches of ICF design.
IOH/POH periodicity of ICF design coaches.
CAMTECH
manual Ref.
Ch.1, page
no 1, Para
103
Modified/corrected instruction.
Coach category
Periodicity (Months)
IOH (In IOH (In
POH (In
depot) workshops) workshops)
New coach turned out by PU or a coach
12#
24
turned out after MLR.
Rajdhani/ Shatabdi
9
18
Mail/ Express, Garib Rath, Jan Shatabdi
9^
18
& OCVS forming part of standard rake
composition of M/E Trains.
Passenger
9@
18
Other OCVS
12 @
24
Note: The concept of a C schedule in the depots, hitherto being followed on the railways,
may be done away with & replaced by an IOH as under:
^ Unit exchange of overhauled bogie supplied by the workshops must be ensured. In case of
logistical issued involved in transporting assembled bogies because of the workshop being far
away from the base depots, the bogie may be attended for IOH in the depots with mandatory
replacement of overhauled wheel sets supplied by workshops.
@ The bogies must be rolled out and the IOH schedule carried out on the bogies in the depot itself
retaining the wheel sets, unless specific attention or change is warranted on the wheel set(s).
The attended bogies must then be provided in the same coach.
# The scope of work to be carried out during IOH in the depot will depend on the train category
being serviced by the coach turned out by PU/ after MLR as marked at ^ and @ respectively.
The tolerance for IOH may be kept as +30/-0 days as in the extant instructions. Periodicity and
tolerance for other coach schedules viz, A & B shall also remain unaltered.
The periodicity of inspection/ complete overhaul of roller bearings and wheel set of ICF design
coaching stock shall however be governed by Boards letter No. 2004/M(C)/137/8 dated 29.11
.07.
Marking the return date on off- POH coaches may be continued to be governed by the
provisions of Boards letter No. 85/M (W)/814/64 dated 11.08.85. The tolerance for retaining
the coach in service beyond the return date shall also continue to be governed by the provision
under Para 2.3.4 of Chapter II of I.R.C.A. rules Pt. IV with partial amendment of replacing C
Schedule with IOH in the depots as per @ above.
The revised IOH/POH periodicity for all ICF coaches as above shall be reckoned for all new
coaches being turned out of the Production units/ MLR and after POH as per the existing return
dates.
This is issued in reference to Railway Boards letter under reference above.
(Govt. of India)
(Ministry of Railways)
Centre
for
Advanced
Maintenance
TECHnology
Excellence in Maintenance
MAHARAJPUR, GWALIOR--474020
..
""
~5)
IINDIAN RAILWAYS
Fax
- 0751- 2470841
No: CAMTECH/M/GWL/MR
01. 23-06-09
""'---'
Sub: 6th Correction slip to Maintenance Manual for BG Coaches of ICF design.
Please find enclosed herewith the 6th correction slip to Coaching Mai:1~enancc
Manual for BG coaches of lCF design. 01 copy of the same is being sent to you for
necessary action please.
~\\~.
For ExecutiveDirector
'"
"
ED/Carriage/ROSa
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS-06 (June-2009)
Page 1 of 1
Correction slip No. 6 for Maintenance Manual for BG coaches of ICF design
Sub.: Inspection of Brake Block Hangers during IOH/POH.
Ref.: RDSO spec. No. C- 9808 (Rev. 2)
Para
Para 318
BOGIE BRAKE
GEAR
Existing
Revised to
viii. Brake block hangers should be removed
Nil
(Add new point,
during every IOH/POH. They should be
viii under this para)
cleaned, and checked visually for cracks,
distortion or excessive corrosion. Hangers
found serviceable should be
Checked for wear on the bores of the hole
( 42 H7) with the help of a plug gauge.
Magnaflux tested for any cracks during
POH.
Bushes and split cotter must be replaced
during POH.
(Govt. of India)
(Ministry of Railways)
Centre
for
Advanced
Maintenance
TECHnology
Excellence in Maintenance
MAHARAJPUR, GWALIOR--474020
G7~
,.\
~-'
"'.-
Sub: 7th Correction slip to Maintenance Manual for BG Coaches of ICF design.
Please find enclosed herewith the 7th correction slip to Coaching Maintenance
Manual for BG coaches of ICF design. 01 copy of the same is being sent to you for
necessary action please.
~~~.
For Executive Director
'-'
"
...
Type of stock
Drawing Number
Axle Box
Bolster
2. Chapter 3, Para 318- The following note may be added under this paraNote: RDSO has issued instructions regarding procurement of Brake Block
Hangers and Maintenance of Brake Gear Rigging vide letter no.
MC/ICF/B/D dtd 03.07.2009. The Brake Gear Rigging should be
maintained as per instructions given by RDSO.
(Govt. of India)
(Ministry of Railways)
Centre
for
Advanced
Maintenance
TECHnology
Excellence in Maintenance
MAHARAJPUR, GWALIOR--474020
------
.~
~j)
INDIAN RAILWAYS
CMEs
All Indian Railways
--- ....
Sub:
Ref:
~o1-Jt(b~
grd correction slip to coach maintenance manual is enclosed. The corrections are as per the
Railway Board's letter referred above. 02 copies of the same are being sent to you for kind
~9M
For Executive Director
, """'---'
.~
C/-
EDME/Coaching/Rly.Bd
ED/Carriage/RDSO
...
Existing Instruction.
Modified/corrected instruction.
(Govt. of India)
(Ministry of Railways)
Centre
for
Advanced
Maintenance
TECHnology
Excellence in Maintenance
MAHARAJPUR, GWALIOR--474020
...
~!!J
INDIAN RAIL WAYS
Fax
- 0751- 2470841
No: CAMTECH/M/GWL/MR
Date: 22-10-2009
.--
Please find enclosed herewith the 9th correction slip to Coaching Maintenance
Manual for BG coaches of ICF design. 02 copies of the same are being sent to you for
information and necessary action please.
~\
... .
For Executive Director
-"---'
.."
...
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS-09 (Oct-2009)
Page 1 of 1
Correction slip No. 9 for Maintenance Manual for BG coaches of ICF design
Sub.: Introduction of air spring at secondary stage in ICF bogie coaches.
Ref.: i) RDSO letter no. MC/CB/MM dated 09.09.2009.
ii) Rly Bd. Letter no. 2007/M(C)/137/7 dated 08.10.2009
Reference above, the following modification/ amendment is being issued to Maintenance
Manual for BG coaches of ICF design.
Para
Para 107b.
Enroute/
Terminating
Examination
of Passenger
Trains
(Point iv)
Existing
iv). As the train passes
the nominated point,
C&W staff should watch
out
vigilantly
for
loose/Hanging/broken
undergear parts of the
coaches, any unusual
sound coming from the
coaches or any other
abnormality
in
the
coaches.
Revised to
iv). As the train passes the nominated point C&W
staff should watch out vigilantly for loose/hanging/
broken undergear parts of the coaches, any unusual
sound coming from the coach or any other
abnormality in the coaches. Special attention should
be paid to air springs in case of coaches provided
with air springs at secondary suspension stage. It
should be ensured that all the air springs are in
inflated condition by noting that the leveling valve
lever is in horizontal position. In case it is not
possible to inflate the air springs of any particular
coach, these should be isolated by air spring
isolating cock and speed of train should be
reduced to 60 kmph, or the coach should be
detached.
Note:
a). A detailed Maintenance Manual of air springs
applicable for mainline ICF bogie coaches (No.
RDSO/2009/CG/CMI-01 of September 2009) has
been prepared by RDSO. Instructions contained
in the maintenance manual should be strictly
followed.
b). Necessary infrastructure required for testing and
inspection of air spring should be provided at the
nominated maintenance points.
c). Stocking of maintenance spares should be
ensured especially for few air springs, control
equipments, leveling valves at primary/secondary
depots for use as unit exchange spares. Leveling
valves may also be kept enroute at major depots
for trouble shooting maintenance depots.
d). Modified Brake Power Certificate issued vide
RDSO letter no. AV.AS.ML dated 18.09.2009
should be used by C&W staff with immediate
effect.
(f~
INDIAN RAIL WAYS
CMEs
All Indian Railways
'":>
-'
Sub:
Correction
Manual.
in 9th Correction
for Coaching
Ref:
In reference to above, the 9th correction slip para l07b. Enroute /Terminating
Examination of passenger trains (Point iv) Note-d) issued by CAMTECH should be
revised and read as under;
Old
d) Modified Brake Power Certificate issued vide RDSO letter no. AV /AS/ML
Revise!!
"--
d) Modified Brake Power Certificate issued vide RDSO letter no. MC/CB/MM
dated 18.09.2009 should be used by C&W staff with immediate effect.
..
Executive Director
CAMTECH/GWL
C/EDME/Coaching/Rly.Bd
ED/Carriage/RDSO
(Govt. of India)
(Ministry of Railways)
IRCAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS-02 (05/2014)
May - 2014
Centre
for
Advanced
Maintenance
TECHnology
Excellence in Maintenance
MAHARAJPUR, GWALIOR--474020
CAMTECH/2002/M/C/CMM/1.0/CS-10
Page 1 of 1
Correction Slip No. 10 for Maintenance Manual for BG coaches of ICF design
Para
Clause No.
1003 c of
Chapter 10.0
Pressing on
Wheel Discs on
Axle
Existing
Revised to
The wheel seat should Since the white lead is withdrawn due to
be lubricated with a
environmental pollution, the castor oil confirming
mixture
of
basic
to IS-435/1973 of special grade as mentioned in
carbonate white lead
table 1 of the specification, having the viscosity
and boiled linseed oil,
6.3-9.0 stokes, is allowed to be used in place of
in the proportion of
Mixture of Basic carbonate white lead paste &
1.2 kg. of white lead
boiled linseed oil, for application on wheel set and
paste to 1 litre of
wheel bore during pressing of wheel on to the axle.
boiled linseed oil. The
In this regard, RDSO letter No. MW/WA/WAP
wheel and axle should
dated 08.02.1993 may be connected for further
be properly aligned on
details.
the wheel press.
The axle end should be Marking
of
assembly
details
such
as
stamped with the shop
manufactures/workshops code, month & year of
code,
date
of
assembly, and pressing on pressure in tones, is
mounting, pressing in
allowed to be stamped on outer face of wheel rim,
pressure, axle no., cast
as the space on journal face is inadequate for
no., cons. no. to enable
stamping.
identification
of
wheels. Care should be
taken to ensure that
wheel disc number is
preserved